Public records library › 26-645 › 25101 - Moscow East City Park Stage Project Manual.pdf
Request 26-645
25101 - Moscow East City Park Stage Project Manual.pdf
PDF · 2.6 MB · released by the City of Moscow on request 26-645
The original PDF opens in a new tab. Open the PDF.
SHA-256 a07e9a3d87cd654d334937e6b24cb74a3950636abee051c11a86db5a953f6cb9
Extracted text
Machine-extracted text layer of the file above, shown verbatim for search and reading. Tables and slides lose their layout. The original file governs.
# 25101 - Moscow East City Park Stage Project Manual.pdf
- path: - path: 25101 - Moscow East City Park Stage Project Manual.pdf
- type: pdf
- size: 2567105 bytes
- pages: 249
- extraction method: text layer (pypdf)
--- Page 1 ---
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
City of Moscow
East City Park Stage Replacement
MOSCOW, IDAHO
July 31, 2026
Design West Architects
254 East Main Street
Pullman, WA 99163
509-***-**13
Fax: 509-***-**27
--- Page 2 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage Table of Contents
Moscow, Idaho 7/30/2026
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 – Part I: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
Document 00 01 00 Invitation to Bid ........................................................................................................................2
Notice to Contractors ...............................................................................................................1
Document 00 10 00 Instructions to Bidders .............................................................................................................7
Document 00 30 00 Bid Proposal Form ..................................................................................................................4
Contractor Affidavit Concerning Alcohol Drug Free Workplace ..............................................1
Bid Bond by Reference (AIA Document A310 or approved equivalent) .................................1
Performance & Labor & Materials Payment Bonds by Reference (AIA Document A312) ......1
Public Works Contract Report, WH-5 ......................................................................................1
DIVISION 00 – Part II: CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
Document Draft Agreement Between Owner & Contractor ......................................................................7
Contractor's Affidavit Concerning Taxes .................................................................................1
Miscellaneous Forms by Reference: ......................................................................................2
Certificate of Insurance
Certificate of Substantial Completion
Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens
Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 00 Summary .................................................................................................................................4
Section 01 23 00 Alternates ................................................................................................................................2
Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures ...........................................................................................2
Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures ...............................................................................................................4
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination & RFI Transmittal .....................................................7
Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation ...................................................................................7
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures & Submittal Transmittal........................................................................9
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements ..............................................................................................................7
Section 01 42 00 References ........................................................................................................................... 13
Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ..........................................................................................6
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements & Substitution Request Form .............................................................7
Section 01 73 00 Execution .................................................................................................................................5
Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching ...............................................................................................................3
Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ...............................................................................................................3
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ...........................................................................................6
Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents .....................................................................................................3
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training ....................................................................................................4
Section 01 80 01 Keynote System ......................................................................................................................1
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 41 00 Demolition ......................................................................................................................................3
Section 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition .......................................................................................................9
DIVISION 03 – Not Used
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
Section 04 22 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies ..............................................................................................................9
DIVISION 05 – Not Used
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
--- Page 3 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage Table of Contents
Moscow, Idaho 7/30/2026
Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................................................................6
Section 06 18 00 Glued-Laminated Construction ......................................................................................................5
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing .............................................................................................................4
Section 07 31 13 Composition Shingles ....................................................................................................................4
Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ......................................................................................................6
Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants ................................................................................................................................9
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
Section 08 00 00 Door Schedule ...............................................................................................................................2
Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ...................................................................................................4
Section 08 34 00 Metal Door Assemblies ..................................................................................................................4
Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware ...............................................................................................................................7
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
Section 09 00 00 Finish Schedule & Material Legend Key ........................................................................................3
Section 09 91 00 Painting ..........................................................................................................................................8
DIVISION 10 through DIVISION 25 – Not Used
DIVISION 26 – Electrical
Section 09 00 00 Finish Schedule & Material Legend Key ........................................................................................3
Section 09 91 00 Painting ..........................................................................................................................................8
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Section 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing ...................................................................................................................3
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 11 23 Aggregate Base .............................................................................................................................2
Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Pavement ..........................................................................................................................1
Section 32 16 23 Concrete Sidewalk .........................................................................................................................1
Section 32 17 23 Pavement Markings .......................................................................................................................1
DIVISION 33 – SITE UTILITIES
Section 33 41 00 Storm Sewer Pipe ..........................................................................................................................1
Section 33 44 13 Area Drains ....................................................................................................................................1
--- Page 4 ---
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
MOSCOW EAST CITY PARK STAGE REPLACEMENT
The City of Moscow, Idaho, is accepting sealed bids at the City Clerk’s office, third floor of City Hall,
206 East Third Street, P.O. Box 9203, Moscow, Idaho, 83843, until 2:00 p.m., prevailing local time,
Tuesday, August 25, 2026. Sealed bids will be read aloud at City Council Chambers of Moscow City Hall,
206 East Third Street, Moscow, Idaho 83843 at 2:05 P.M. prevailing local time on August 25, 2026.
Plans, specifications, bid proposal forms , and other information are available for examination at
questcdn.com via the link provided on t he City of Moscow Website at: www.ci.moscow.id.us – click on
“Business” / “Bid Opportunities” / “Moscow East City Park Stage Replacement .” Once on the Quest site,
you may download the digital plan documents for a non-refundable fee of $22.00. The Quest project number
is 10290390. Please contact QuestCDN.com at 952-***-**32 or i***@questcdn.com for assistance in free
membership registration, downloading, and working with digital project information.
Plans, specifications, bid proposal forms , and other information are also available at the following Plan
Centers:
Abadan Regional Plan Center –Spokane, WA
Associated Builders & Contractors, Inc. – Spokane, WA
Hermiston Plan Center – Hermiston, OR
Idaho Associated General Contractors – Boise, ID
Lewiston-Clarkston Plan Service 2117 – Lewiston, ID
Spokane Regional Plan Center – Spokane, WA
Tri-City Construction Council – Kennewick, WA
Walla Walla Valley Plan Center – Walla Walla, WA
Wenatchee Plan & Copy Center – Wenatchee, WA
Yakima Plan Center – Yakima, WA
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A ground-up stage structure including a 560 square foot unconditioned
CMU building, concrete stage , and glued -laminated and cross- laminated timber roof structure. Site
pathway revisions and site concrete and asphalt paving.
BID BOND: A bid bond equal to 5% of the amount bid must accompany the bid proposal. (See
instructions to bidders.)
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE: Public Works Contractor's License for the State of Idaho
is required to bid on this project. (See instructions to bidders and general conditions for further bidder
qualifications.)
CONTRACT TIME: (151) calendar days from commencement of construction, substantial completion
no later than 03/07/2027 (see instructions to bidders, bid proposal, and agreement.)
ESTIMATED PROJECT COST: $783,184
PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A pre-bid conference will be held Tuesday, August 11, 2026, at 10:00 AM, at
the East City Park Restroom building, 900 E. Third Street, Moscow.
No bidder may withdraw his proposal after the date and time set for opening thereof or before Award of
Contract, unless said award is delayed beyond 30 days. The undersigned further agrees that City shall have
the right to accept or reject any bid which rejection or acceptance is deemed to be in the best interest of City.
END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.
--- Page 5 ---
Publish Dates: Saturday, August 1, 2026 & Saturday, August 8, 2026
Laurie Hopkins, City Clerk
--- Page 6 ---
City Of Moscow East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
00 01 00-1
7/31/2026
-
LICENSING OF PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTORS NOTICE
NOTICE LICENSING OF PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTORS STATE OF IDAHO
UNLAWFUL For any person to engage in the business or act in the capacity of a PUBLIC WORKS
CONTRACTOR in the State of Idaho without a license.
PENALTIES Any person, firm, co‐partnership, or corporation, acting as a PUBLIC WORKS
CONTRACTOR without a license shall be guilty of a MISDEMEANOR.
EVERY PUBLIC OFFICER who knowingly lets a public contract to any person, firm, co‐ partnership,
or corporation, who does not hold a license shall be guilty of a MISDEMEANOR.
EXCEPTION No contractor shall be required to have a license in order to submit a bid or proposal for
contracts for public works FINANCED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY FEDERAL AID FUNDS, but at or
prior to the award and execution of any such contract by the State of Idaho, or other contracting authority,
the successful bidder shall secure a license.
SUPPLY ONLY CONTRACTS Contractors whose scope of work is supply only are not required to
have a public works license.
WHO MUST BE LICENSED “Public works contractors,” – which is any “builder,” or “specialty
contractor,” or any person who offers to submit a proposal or enter into a contract with the STATE OF
IDAHO, or any COUNTY, CITY, TOWN, VILLAGE, SCHOOL DISTRICT, IRRIGATION DISTRICT,
DRAINAGE DISTRICT, SEWER DISTRICT, FIRE DISTRICT, or any other taxing subdivision or
district of the State, authorities to let or award contracts for the construction, repair or reconstruction of
any public work.
PUBLIC WORK includes HEAVY, HIGHWAY, BUILDING and SPECIALTY construction.
EXEMPTION Any construction, alteration, improvement or repair involving an estimate cost of less
than $10,000.
AUTHORITY ‐ Title 54, Chapter 19, Idaho Code as amended, “THE PUBLIC WORKS
CONTRACTORS LICENSE ACT.”
DIVISION OF BUILDING SAFETY
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTORS LICENSING
1090 E Watertower Street, Suite 150
Meridian, ID 83642
Phone: 208‐334‐4057
END OF SECTION
--- Page 7 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
DOCUMENT 00 10 00 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS
1.1 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document
A201, or in other contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.
1.2 “Addenda” are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the
contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or
corrections. The contents of Addenda are issued in no particular order and therefore should be
carefully and completely reviewed.
1.3 An “Alternate Bid” (or “Alternate”) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from
the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding
Documents, is accepted.
1.4 The “Base Bid” is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work
described in the Bidding Documents as the base to which work may be added or from which work
may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
1.5 A “Bid” is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion thereof,
submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents, for the sums therein stipulated.
1.6 A “Bidder” is a person or entity who submits a Bid.
1.7 The “Bidding Documents” include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,
the bid form, other sample bidding and contract forms, the Bid Bond, any required Affidavit of
Non-Collusion, and the proposed Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued prior to
receipt of bids.
1.8 The “Contract Documents” proposed for the Work consist of the Agreement for the Work, the
Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and the Revised General Conditions of the Contract
as well as any Supplemental, Special, and other Conditions included in the Project Manual, the
Drawings, the Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after
execution of the Contract.
1.9 A “Sub-bidder” is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or
labor for a portion of the Work.
1.10 A “Unit Price” is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials,
equipment or services as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 2
BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS
2.1 By making it’s Bid, each Bidder represents that:
2.1.1 It has read and understands the Bidding Documents, and its Bid is made in accordance
with them
2.1.2 It has attended the pre-bid meeting(s) as required by the Bidding Documents.
2.1.3 Its Bid is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment required by the Bidding
Documents and is made without exception.
2.1.4 It will perform with its own forces at least the percentage of the Work required by the
Bidding Documents.
2.1.5 It has checked its copies of the Project Manual with the Table of Contents bound therein
to ensure the Project Manual is complete.
2.1.6 It has examined and coordinated all Drawings, Contract Documents, and Specifications
for any other contracts to be awarded separately from, but in connection with, the Work
being bid upon, so that the Bidder is fully informed as to conditions affecting the Work
under the contract being bid upon.
2.1.7 It has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, Contract Documents, and the Project
site, including any existing buildings, and it has satisfied itself as to the nature, location,
character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods,
--- Page 8 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished, and all other requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Bidder has also satisfied itself as to the conditions and other
matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or
the cost or difficulty thereof, including but not limited to those conditions and matters
affecting: transportation, access, disposal, handling and storage of materials, equipment
and other items; availability and quality of labor, water, electric power and utilities;
availability and condition of roads, climatic conditions and seasons; physical conditions at
the Project site and the surrounding locality; topography and ground surface conditions;
and equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and at all times during the
performance of the Work. The failure of the Bidder fully to acquaint itself with any
applicable condition or matter shall not in any way relieve the Bidder from the
responsibility for performing the Work in accordance with, and for the Contract Sum and
within the Contract Time provided for in, the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.1 Copies
3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office and
other locations designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for
the deposit sum stated. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide
Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of
Bids. The cost of replacement of any missing or damaged documents will be deducted
from the deposit. A Bidder awarded a Contract may retain the Bidding Documents, and
its deposit will be refunded.
3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders or others unless specifically
offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid.
3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the
Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
3.1.4 The Owner and/or the Architect make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the
above terms only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a
license or grant permission for any other use.
3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents
3.2.1 Bidders and Sub-bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity,
inconsistency, or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding
Documents or of the site and local conditions. All Bidders and Sub-bidders shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with specified products and installation procedures and
submit to the Architect any objections (in writing) no later than 10 days prior to the Bid
Date. The submittal of the Bid constitutes acceptance of products and procedures
specified as sufficient, adequate, and satisfactory for completion of the Contract.
3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents
shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to
the date for receipt of Bids.
3.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by
written Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents
made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such
interpretations, corrections and changes.
3.2.4 Reference in the singular to an article, device or piece of equipment shall include as
many of such articles as are indicated in the Contract Documents or as are required to
compete the installation.
3.2.5 Bidders should assume that the exact locations of underground or hidden utilities may be
somewhat different from any location indicated in the surveys or Contract Documents.
3.3 Substitutions
--- Page 9 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3.3.1 The materials, products, procedures and equipment described in the Bidding Documents
establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality that must
be met by any proposed substitution.
3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless a written request for
approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt
of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment proposed
to be replaced and a complete description of the proposed substitute, including drawings,
cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation.
A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that
incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The proposer has the
burden to prove the merit of the proposed substitute; by proposing the substitution, the
Bidder represents that it has personally investigated the proposed material or product
and determined that it is equal or better in all respects to that specified, that the same or
better warranty will be provided for the substitution, that complete cost data, including all
direct and indirect costs of any kind, has been presented and that it will coordinate the
installation of the substitute if accepted and make all associated changes in the Work.
The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be
final. Written request for approval shall constitute a guarantee by the Bidder that the
articles or materials are equal or superior to those specified, unless otherwise noted. To
the extent the proposed substitution will require additional work by the Architect or its
consultants, the Contractor will be required to pay the Architect or its consultants for this
work at their customary hourly rates.
3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, the approval will
be set forth in a written Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any
other manner.
3.3.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider a
written request for the substitution of material or products in place of those specified in
the Contract Document only under exceptional circumstances as specified.
3.4 Addenda
3.4.1 All Addenda will be written. They will be mailed, e-mailed, faxed or delivered to those
known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. E-mail is
preferred.
3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents
are on file for that purpose.
3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than three days prior to the date for receipt of Bids
except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or including postponement of the
date for receipt of Bids.
3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting its Bid that it has received all Addenda
issued, and it shall acknowledge their receipt in its Bid.
ARTICLE 4
BIDDING PROCEDURE
4.1 Forms and Style of Bids
4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding
Documents.
4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink.
4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both
words and figures; in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words
shall govern.
4.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.
4.1.5 All requested Alternates should be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter
“No Change.” If there is no entry, it will be presumed that there is no change in the Base
Bid.
--- Page 10 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the
Bidder may, without forfeiture of its bid security, state its refusal to accept award of less
than the combination of Bids it so stipulates. The Bidder shall make no additional
stipulations on the bid form nor qualify its Bid in any other manner.
4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement
describing the Bidder as a sole proprietor, a partnership, a joint venture, a corporation, or
another described form of legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or
persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid submitted by an agent
shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the
Bidder.
4.1.8 The Bid shall include in the sum stated all applicable taxes imposed by law.
4.1.9 The Form of Proposal may contain, for the Owner’s accounting purposes only, a
breakdown of some or all of the components included in the Base Bid.
4.2 Listing of Subcontractors
4.2.1 In the spaces provided on the Form of Proposal, the Bidder shall name the
Subcontractors whose subcontract amount is more than ten percent of the Base Bid.
The Bidder, if awarded the Contract, will subcontract with the listed Subcontractor for
performance of the portion of the Work designated on the Form of Proposal, subject to
the provisions of the Contract for Construction. Should alternate bids require different
named subcontractors, the Bidder shall identify the alternate subcontractors and the
affected portion of the Work.
4.2.2 If a listed Subcontractor is unable to comply with the bond-ability requirements of the
Bidding Documents or other requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may
require the Bidder to replace the Subcontractor with a Subcontractor acceptable to the
Owner at no change in the Contract Sum or Time.
4.3 Bid Security
4.3.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security equal to five percent of the base bid.
The bid security constitutes a pledge that the Bidder will enter into the Contract with the
Owner in the form provided, in a timely manner, and on the terms stated in its Bid and will
furnish in a timely manner the payment and performance bonds, certificates of insurance,
Contractor’s Construction Schedule, and all other documents required in the Contract
Documents. Should the Bidder fail or refuse to enter into the Contract or fail to furnish
such documents, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as
liquidated damages, not as a penalty.
4.3.2 The bid security shall be in the form of a certified or bank cashier’s check payable to the
Owner or a bid bond executed by a bonding company licensed in the State of
Washington on a Public Works Bond or equivalent form.
4.3.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is
being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and payment and
performance bonds have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that
Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected.
4.4 Submission of Bids
4.4.1 The Bid, the bid security and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid
shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the
party specified in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid as receiving the Bids and shall be
identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the
designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail,
the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation
“SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof.
4.4.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of
Bids indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by
Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned
unopened.
--- Page 11 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
4.4.3 The Bidder assumes full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for
receipt of Bids.
4.4.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration.
4.5 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid
4.5.1 By submitting its Bid, each Bidder agrees that its Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or
canceled by the Bidder during a sixty-day period following the time and date designated
for the receipt of Bids.
4.5.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid submitted may be
modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for
receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by
telegram or fax; if by telegram or fax, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder
shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.
The notice shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.
4.5.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids
provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.
4.5.4 Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted.
ARTICLE 5
CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
5.1 Opening of Bids
5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified
Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the
Base Bids and Alternate Bids, if any, will be made available to Bidders.
5.2 Rejection of Bids
5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right but not the obligation to reject any or all Bids for any
reason or for no reason, to reject a Bid not accompanied by required bid security or by
other data required by the Bidding Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way
incomplete or irregular.
5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award)
5.3.1 The Owner intends (but is not bound) to award a Contract to the lowest responsible and
responsive Bidder, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the
requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The
Owner shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid(s) received
and to accept the Bid(s) which, in its judgment, is in its own best interests.
5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless
otherwise specifically provided in Article 9, and to determine the low Bidder n the basis of
the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted.
5.4 Bid Protest Procedures
5.4.1 A Bidder protesting for any reason the Bidding Documents, a bidding procedure, the
award of the Contract or any other aspect arising from or relating in any way to the
bidding shall cause a written protest to be filed with the Owner within three business days
of the event giving rise to the protest and, in any event, no later than three business days
after the date upon which bids are opened. The written protest shall include the name of
the protesting Bidder, a detailed description of the specific factual and legal grounds for
the protest, copies of all supporting documents, and the specific relief requested. The
written protest shall be delivered to:
City Attorney
City of Moscow
--- Page 12 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
5.4.2 Upon receipt of the written protest, the Owner will consider the protest. The Owner may
provide any other affected Bidder(s) the opportunity to respond in writing to the protest
within three business days of the Owner's receipt of the protest. If the protest is not
resolved by mutual agreement of the protesting Bidder and the Owner, the
Superintendent of the Owner will review the issues and promptly furnish a final and
binding written decision to the protesting Bidder and any other affected Bidder(s) within
six business days of the Owner’s receipt of the protest (If more than one protest is filed,
the Owner’s decision will be provided within six business days of the Owner’s receipt of
the last protest).
5.4.3 Failure to comply with these protest procedures will render a protest waived.
5.4.4 Timely and proper compliance with and exhaustion of these protest procedures shall be a
condition precedent to any permissible judicial consideration of protest.
ARTICLE 6
POST BID INFORMATION
6.1 Information from Apparent Low Bidder
6.1.1 Within five days of the Architect’s request, the apparent low Bidder shall submit to the
Architect and Owner: (1) a properly executed Contractor’s Qualification Statement on the
form provided; (2) a letter or form from the Bidder’s insurance company stating that the
insurance required by the Contract Documents will become effective upon execution of
the Contract; (3) a detailed breakdown of the Bid in a form acceptable to the Owner; (4)
the names of the persons or entities (including a designation of the Work to be performed
with the Contractor’s own forces, and the names of those who are to furnish materials or
equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of
the Work; 5) the proprietary names and the suppliers of the principal items or systems of
materials and equipment proposed for the Work. Failure to provide such information in a
timely manner may constitute an event of breach permitting forfeiture of the Bid security.
6.1.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner
the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform
the Work described in the Bidding Documents. The responsibility of the Bidder may be
judged in part by the responsibility of these proposed entities.
6.1.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the
Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or
entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect ahs reasonable objection to a
proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2)
submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with no adjustment in the Base Bid or
Alternate Bid, even if there is a cost to the Bidder occasioned by the substitution. In the
event of withdrawal, bid security will not be forfeited.
6.1.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and the Architect
have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were
proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and the
Architect.
6.2 Information from Other Bidders
6.2.1 All other Bidders designated by the Architect as under consideration for award of a
Contract shall also provide a properly executed Contractor’s Qualification Statement, if so
requested by the Owner.
6.3 Bidding Mistakes
6.3.1 The Owner will not be obligated to consider notice of claimed bidding mistakes received
more than three business days after the bid opening.
--- Page 13 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 10 00 - 7
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
ARTICLE 7
PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
7.1 Bond Requirements
7.1.1 Within ten days after the issuance of the Conditional Notice to Proceed, and prior to the
date of execution of the Contract, the Bidder shall furnish evidence satisfactory to the
Owner of its ability to obtain statutory bonds pursuant to RCW 39.08 covering the faithful
performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in the
form and amount prescribed in the Contract Documents. The cost of such bond shall be
included in the Base Bid and with each Alternate Bid.
7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds
7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner within ten days after the date of
execution of the Contract and prior to commencing operations at the site.
ARTICLE 8
FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
8.1 Form to be Used
8.1.1 The Agreement for the Work will be written on Revised AIA Document A-101, “Revised
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, where the basis of payment is a
Stipulated Sum,” as modified and supplemented. The Agreement for the Work shall include the
Revised General Conditions (Revised AIA Document A-201, any Supplemental or Special
Conditions, and the other Contract Documents.
8.2 Conflicts
8.2.1 In the case of conflict between the provisions of these Instructions and any of the Bidding
Document, these Instructions shall govern. In case of conflict between the provisions of
the Bidding Document sand the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall
govern.
ARTICLE 9
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
9.1 Liquidated Damages
The Contract Documents specify liquidated damages for the Owner and the Contractor.
9.2 Retainage
The Contract Documents specify 5% retainage.
9.3 Contract Time
The Contract Documents specify the Contract Time. TIMELY COMPLETION OF THIS
PROJECT IS ESSENTIAL TO THE OWNER.
End of Document 00 10 00
--- Page 14 ---
Bidders Initials ______
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 30 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
DOCUMENT 00 30 00 - BID PROPOSAL FORM
Project:
City of Moscow BID OPENING DATE: August 25, 2026
Moscow East City Park Stage Replacement BID DUE TIME: 2:00 P.M
MOSCOW, IDAHO BID OPENING TIME: 2:05 P.M
BID OPENING LOCATION:
City Council Chambers of Moscow City Hall, 2026 East Third Street
BIDDER'S NAME AND ADDRESS:
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
TO: The City of Moscow, Idaho
The bidder, in compliance with the Invitation for Bids for the above-referenced project, having examined
the drawings, specifications, related documents, and the site of the proposed work, and having become
familiar with local conditions surrounding the proposed work, including availability of materials and labor,
hereby proposes to perform all work in accordance with the contract documents, within the time limits set
therein, and at the prices stated below, which are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work.
The bidder acknowledges the receipt of the Addenda listed below and have included these provisions in
the bid:
Addendum No. Dated
Addendum No. Dated
Addendum No. Dated
BASE PROPOSAL: ALL WORK NOT DEFINED IN A BID ALTERNATE, Bidder agrees to perform all of
the base proposal work described in the specifications and shown on the plans for the sum of
______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
$___________________________________ (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. If there
is a discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
BID ALTERNATE NO. 1:
ALTERNATE No. 1 – Concrete Dancer Plaza: Bidder agrees to perform all of the work described in the
specifications and shown on the plans for the sum of
______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
$___________________________________ (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. If there
is a discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
--- Page 15 ---
Bidders Initials ______
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 30 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
ALTERNATE No. 2 – Service Entrance Rated Service Panelboard With 400A Main Breaker Panel:
Bidder agrees to perform all of the work described in the specifications and shown on the plans for the
sum of
______________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
$___________________________________ (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. If there
is a discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
The undersigned further agrees that the HAI shall have the right to accept, reject, or waive any
irregularities with the bids deemed to be in the best interest of the HAI and the City of Moscow.
In submitting this bid, the bidder agrees:
The bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any
irregularities in the bidding.
In submitting this bid, the bidder agrees:
1. The bid shall remain valid and may not be withdrawn for a period of forty-five (45) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. Bid alternate pricing shall remain valid for (90)
calendar days following the bid opening, should the Owner choose to accept bid alternates after
contract award.
2. To accept the provision of the Instruction to Bidders regarding disposition of Bid Security.
3. The bid security attached, in the amount of 5% of the bid amount, is to become the property of
the Owner in the event the contract and bond are not executed with the time set forth as
liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby.
4. To furnish within five (5) days after receipt of properly prepared Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor the following documents: Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond
in the amounts of 100% of the bid amount by the surety company authorized to do business in
the State of Idaho, a Certificate of Insurance issued by a surety company authorized to do
business in the State of Idaho and accompanied by Power of Attorney, a Contractor's Affidavit
Concerning Taxes, and the Public Works Contract Report on Subcontractors
5. To accomplish the work in accordance with the bidding documents and commence work on or
before the date of Notice to Proceed.
6. To complete the work by the Date of Substantial Completion which shall be One hundred twenty
(120) consecutive calendar days or less after Notice to Proceed.
7. That the contract drawings may be supplemented by additional drawings and specifications in
explanation and elaboration of the contract drawings and it is agreed that such supplemental
drawings, when not in conflict with the base contract documents, will have the same force and
effect as if attached hereto and that when received they will be considered a part of the contract.
8. To execute the work using the sub-contractors named below in the Bid Form Submittal.
The Idaho Naming Law (Section 67-2310, Idaho Code) and requires that general contractors must list the
business name and Public Works license number of certain subcontractors. The law stipulates that these
will be the major fire sprinkler, mechanical, and electrical subcontractors who the general contractor
agrees to engage to do the work. The firms listed below must be those who will actually do the work
on site regardless of contractual considerations between the general contractor and
subcontractors. If the scope of project itself does not include mechanical or electrical components, any
firm hired to do incidental piping or wiring such as installation of temporary services, need not be listed.
--- Page 16 ---
Bidders Initials ______
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 30 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
The names and addresses of subcontractors who will accomplish the work, subject to approval of the
Owner and architect, if the undersigned is awarded the contract, are as follows:
Plumbing system No____
Name of Plumbing contractor______________________________________________________
Public Works license number_______________________
Electrical system No____
Name of electrical contractor_________________________________________________________
Public Works license number_________________________________________________________
QUALIFICATIONS / EXPERIENCE: The bidder certifies that the attached form lists the 5 most recent
public works projects in excess of $250,000 contract value that have been, or are being, accomplished by
the contractor. These project references will be used as a basis to determine if the apparent low bid is
made by a responsible and competent contractor.
Enclosed is bid guarantee consisting of: __________________________ in the amount of five percent
(5%) of the bid amount. (Bid Bond) (Cashier’s Check)
The undersigned notifies that they are, or are capable of becoming prior to contract execution, a Public
Works Contractor and if currently licensed their Idaho State Public Works Contractor's License No. is
____________________, and is domiciled in the State of ___________________.
Dated at this day of , 20 .
Respectfully submitted,
(Seal, if bid is by a corporation)
Name of Bidder (Company)
Business Address Signature of authorized representative
City, State, Zip Code Title
Telephone
--- Page 17 ---
Bidders Initials ______
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 00 30 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
QUALIFICATIONS / EXPERIENCE: The bidder certifies that the list below contains the five most recent
public works projects in excess of $250,000 contract value that have been, or are being, accomplished by
the contractor over the past three year period. Use additional copies of this form if necessary to list all
projects. These project references will be used as a basis to determine if the apparent low bid is made by
a responsible and competent contractor.
Project Title: Location: Reference: Architect or Client
(Name & telephone number)
END OF DOCUMENT 00 30 00
--- Page 18 ---
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT Page 1 of 1
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT
CONCERNING ALCOHOL AND DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE
STATE OF ( )
COUNTY OF ( )
Pursuant to the Idaho Code, Section 72-1717, I, the undersigned, being duly sworn, depose and
certify that ________________________________ is in compliance with the provisions of Idaho
Code section 72-1717; that ________________________________________________
Provides a drug-free workplace program that complies with the provisions of Idaho Code, title
72, chapter 17 and will maintain such program throughout the life of a state construction contract
and that _____________________________________________________________
Shall subcontract work only to subcontractors meeting the requirements of Idaho Code, section
72-1717(1)(a).
_________________________________________________
Name of Contractor
_________________________________________________
Address
_________________________________________________
City and State
By_______________________________________________
(Signature)
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20_____.
Commission expires:
_______________________________________
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing at
________________________________________
________________________________________
--- Page 19 ---
City Of Moscow East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
1
7/31/2026
BID BOND
By Reference
By reference, the printed document " Bid Bond, AIA Document A310, Current Edition" shall be used to
accompany the Bid as specified hereinbefore.
Printed company forms, approved by The American Institute of architects and so verified, may be used in
lieu of AIA Document.
Refer to Instructions to Bidders for description of Bid Bond requirements.
Attorneys-in-fact who sign Bid Bonds shall be licensed in the State of Idaho and must file with each bond
a certified and effectively dated copy of their power -of-attorney on the form specified and bound in this
specification document if the Bid Bond is executed on AIA Document A310. Approved printed company
forms may be used in lieu of form hereinbefore specified.
END OF BID BOND SECTION
--- Page 20 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
1
7/31/2026
PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS
By Reference
By Reference the printed forms, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, standard
form of the American Institute of Architects, AIA Doc. A31 2, Current Edition, Shall be used in the amount
of 100% of the Contract Amount.
Attorneys-in-fact who sign Performance and Labor and Material payment bonds shall be licensed in the
State of Idaho and must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their
power-of-attorney forms to Bidders for their use.
END OF PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND SECTION
--- Page 21 ---
Form WH-5
Public Works Contract Report
Contract awarded by (public body and address)
Contract awarded to (contractor’s name and address)
State of incorporation Federal Employer Identification Number (EIN) Date qualified to do business in Idaho
Business operates as Public works contractor license number
Sole Proprietorship Partnership Corporation LLC
Sole proprietor’s Social Security number Idaho sellers permit number Idaho withholding tax permit number
Awarding agency project number Amount of contract
$
Description and location of work to be performed
EFO00168 05-27-2020 Page 1 of 2
Contractors awarded Idaho public works contracts must submit this form to the Tax Commission within 30 days of
receiving the award. (Idaho Code sections 54-1904A and 63-3624(g)).
Project Dates
Scheduled project start date: Completion date:
If the following information isn’t available at this time, please enter date it will be:
All Subcontractors
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
--- Page 22 ---
EFO00168 05-27-2020 Page 2 of 2
Suppliers
All Subcontractors (continued)
List your major suppliers of materials, equipment, and supplies. Include items removed from inventory and items provided to you
by the government agency for use in this project.
Name Federal EIN Total value
$
Address Materials and equipment purchased and used
City, State, ZIP Code Phone number Please select how sales or use tax was paid.
Tax paid to supplier Tax paid to state* No tax was paid
Form WH-5 (continued)
*If you’re reporting any untaxed materials, equipment, or supplies as “items subject to use tax” on your Idaho return,
provide the period when you did or will report it:
If you paid tax to a state other than Idaho, write the name state next to “total value” boxes, above. For any tax due that you
haven’t reported yet, include payment with this form. You can make copies of this form is you need more room.
Sign
Here
Authorized signature Print name Phone number Date
File with the Idaho State Tax Commission, PO Box 36, Boise ID 83722-0410
For more information, call (208-***-**18 | Fax: (208-***-**19 | Email: c***@tax.idaho.gov
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN
Address Public works contractor license number
City State ZIP Code Amount of subcontract
$
Description of work
Name Federal EIN Total value
$
Address Materials and equipment purchased and used
City, State, ZIP Code Phone number Please select how sales or use tax was paid.
Tax paid to supplier Tax paid to state* No tax was paid
Name Federal EIN Total value
$
Address Materials and equipment purchased and used
City, State, ZIP Code Phone number Please select how sales or use tax was paid.
Tax paid to supplier Tax paid to state* No tax was paid
--- Page 23 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 1 OF 8
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
FOR PROJECT NAME
BETWEEN CITY OF MOSCOW, IDAHO
AND COMPANY
THIS CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT FOR PROJECT NAME BETWEEN CITY OF
MOSCOW, IDAHO, AND COMPANY (hereinafter “Agreement”), dated this ____ day of
______________________, 2026, is made by and between City of Moscow, Idaho, a municipal
corporation of the State of Idaho, 206 East Third Street, Moscow, Idaho, 83843 (hereinafter
"CITY"), and Company Name, Full Address (hereinafter "CONTRACTOR"):
W I T N E S S E T H:
WHEREAS, pursuant to the invitation of CITY, extended through a n “Invitation to Bid ”, see
Attachment “A”, CONTRACTOR submitted a Bid P roposal containing an offer invited by said
invitation; and
WHEREAS, CITY has determined that said offer was the lowest responsive Bid Proposal; and
WHEREAS, CITY has accepted CONTRACTOR’s Bid Proposal;
NOW THEREFORE, the Parties to this Agreement, in consideration of the mutual covenants and
stipulations set out, agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between CITY and
CONTRACTOR concerning the work to be performed, are this Agreement, pages one (1) through
eight (8) and the following:
1. Drawings, Specifications and Proposal for: Project Name, City of Moscow Project No.
Project Number, Attachment "A" consisting of # of pages pages;
2. Bid Proposal of CONTRACTOR, dated date, 2026, Attachment “B”, consisting of #
of pages pages;
3. Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance Certificates;
4. Addendum No. , if applicable, Attachment "C", consisting of # of pages pages; and
5. Change Orders, which may be delivered or issued after the effective date of this
Agreement.
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed in Article 1. This Agreement may only
be amended by change order as provided in the General Conditions of Attachment “A”.
ARTICLE 2.
WORK
--- Page 24 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 2 OF 8
CONTRACTOR shall complete the entire work as specified, indicated and required under the
Contract Documents, contained herein under Article 1. for CITY project (hereinafter “Project”)
titled:
Project Name
ARTICLE 3.
CONTRACT TIME/SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The work to be performed pursuant to this Agreement shall be substantitally completed on or
before DATE, or other time considerations , unless adjustment of the Agreement time is made in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall begin work in
conformance with the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR and CITY recognize that time is of the essence and that CITY will suffer financial
loss if the Project is not completed within the time specified above, unless approved extensions
thereof are permitted in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. The P arties also
recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration
proceeding, the actual loss suffered by CITY if the Project is not completed on time. Accordingly,
instead of requiring any such proof, CITY and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages
for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay CITY One Half of One Percent (0.5%)
of the Contract Sum for each day that expires after the time specified above for Substantial
Completion until the Project is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if
CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Project within the Time
of Completion or by any proper extension thereof granted by CITY , CONTRACTOR shall pay
CITY One Half of One Percent (0.5%) of the Contract Sum for each day that expires after the time
specified above for completion, until the Project is completed and ready for final payment.
ARTICLE 4.
CONTRACT SUM
CITY shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the work for the Project in accordance with the
Contract Documents in current funds in the amount of Dollar Amount ($ ), as submitted by
CONTRACTOR. In no event shall the Contract amount exceed CONTRACTOR’s bid amount of
$ , unless otherwise authorized by CITY by written agreement. Said Contract Sum shall be
paid in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 5.
TERMINATION
Termination provisions are governed by the attached Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 6.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
The Parties warrant by their signature s that no employer -employee relationship is established
between CONTRACTOR and CITY by the terms of this Agreement. It is understood by the Parties
hereto that CONTRACTOR is an independent contractor and, as such, neither CONTRACTOR
--- Page 25 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 3 OF 8
nor CONTRACTOR’s employees, agents, representatives or subcontractors, if any, are employees
of CITY for any purpose, including for purposes of tax, retirement system, and social security
(FICA) withholding.
ARTICLE 7.
SCOPE OF SERVICES
CONTRACTOR shall perform all work required by the Contract Documents. All work shall be
completed in accordance with the specifications and plans established for this Project.
ARTICLE 8.
HOLD HARMLESS/INDEMNIFICATION
In addition to other rights granted to CITY by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR agrees
to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless CITY, its officers, agents, employees, and engineers, from
and against any and all losses, law suits, actions, claims, judgements for damages, or any injuries
or damages received or sustained by any person, persons, or property, and losses, expenses, and
other costs , including litigation costs and attorney’s fees, arising out of, resulting from, or in
connection with the acts , performances, activities, errors or omissions by CONTRACTOR,
CONTRACTOR’s servants, agents, officers, employees, representatives, guests, business invitees
or its subcontractors; or on account of or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work;
or through use of unacceptable materials in constructing the work; or because of any claims or
amounts recovered from any infringements of patent, trademark or copyright; or from any claims
or amounts arising out of or recovered under the Worker s’ Compensation Act or any other law,
ordinance, order, or decree.
ARTICLE 9.
CONFLICT OF INTEREST
CONTRACTOR covenants that it presently has no interest and will not acquire any interest, direct
or indirect, in the Project, which would conflict in any manner or degree with the performance of
CONTRACTOR’s services hereunder. CONTRACTOR further covenants that, in performing this
Agreement, CONTRACTOR will employ no person who has any such interest. Should any conflict
of interest arise during the performance of this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall immediately
disclose such conflict to CITY.
ARTICLE 10.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, MODIFICATION AND ASSIGNABILITY
This Agreement and the attachments hereto contain the entire Agreement between the Parties, and
no statements, promises, or inducements made by either Party, or agents of either Party are valid
or binding unless contained herein. This Agreement may not be enlarged, modified or altered
except upon written agreement signed by the Parties hereto. CONTRACTOR may not subcontract
or assign its rights (including the right to compensation) or duties arising hereunder, other than as
provided within the Contract Documents, without the prior written consent and express
authorization of CITY.
ARTICLE 11.
--- Page 26 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 4 OF 8
LICENSES AND ADHERENCE TO LAW REQUIRED
CONTRACTOR represents that it possesses the skill and experience necessary and all licenses
required to perform the services under this Agreement. CONTRACTOR further agrees to comply
with all applicable Federal, State and Local statutes and regulations in the performance of the
services hereunder, and are hereby made a part of this Agreement and shall be adhered to at all
times. Violation of any of these statutes or regulations by CONTRACTOR shall be deemed
material and shall subject CONTRACTOR to termination of this Agreement for cause. No pleas
of misunderstanding or ignorance on the part of CONTRACTOR will, in any way, serve to modify
the provisions of this requirement. CONTRACTOR and its surety shall indemnify, defend and
hold harmless CITY and its employees, agents, engineers and representatives against any claim or
liability arising from or based on the violation of any such laws, codes, ordinances, or regulations,
whether by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR’s employees, or its subcontractors.
Anti-Boycott Against Israel Act. CONTRACTOR certifies it is not currently engaged in, and will
not for the duration of th is Agreement engage in, a boycott of goods and services from Israel or
territories under its control. Failure to comply with I daho Code § 67-2346 will result in this
Agreement being void as against public policy.
Ownership or Operation by China. Pursuant to Idaho Code § 67-2359, CONTRACTOR certifies
that it is not currently owned or operated by the government of China and will not for the duration
of this Agreement be owned or operated by the government of China. The terms in this section
defined in Idaho Code § 67-2359 shall have the meaning defined therein.
Employment of Residents of Idaho. Pursuant to Idaho Code § 44-1001, CONTRACTOR certifies
that it will employ ninety-five percent (95%) bona fide Idaho residents, as that term is defined in
Idaho Code § 44-1003, as employees for the completion of the terms required in this Agreement.
If CONTRACTOR employs less than fifty (50) employees on this Project , CONTRACTOR may
employ up to ten percent (10%) nonresidents for the completion of the terms required in this
Agreement. In all cases, CONTRACTOR agrees to give a preference to bona fide Idaho residents.
The Parties agree that if Project involves the expenditure of federal aid funds, that this clause will
not be enforced in a manner that conflicts with federal statutes prescribing a labor preference for
veterans or prohibiting unlawful discrimination or preferences among United States citizens.
Not an Abortion Provider or Affiliate. Pursuant to Idaho Code Title 18 Chapter 87,
CONTRACTOR certifies that it is not an abortion provider or an affiliate of any abortion provider
and does not, and will not for the duration of this Agreement, authorize the use of state facilities
or public funds for abortion related activity.
Anti-Boycott of Certain Sectors. Pursuant to Idaho Code § 67-2347A, CONTRACTOR certifies
that it is not engaged in, and will not for the duration of this Agreement engage in, a boycott of
any individual or company because the individual or company 1) engages in or supports the
exploration, production, utilization, transportation, sale or manufacture of fossil fuel-based
energy, timber, minerals, hydroelectric power, nuclear power, or agriculture or 2) engages in or
supports the manufacture, distribution, sale, or use of firearms, as defined in Idaho Code § 18-
3302 (2)(d).
ARTICLE 12.
--- Page 27 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 5 OF 8
EMPLOYMENT DISCRIMINATION
It is illegal under the U.S. Federal law to discriminate against an employee, either intentionally or
through disparate impact, on account of race, color, gender, religion, sex (including pregnancy),
national origin, disability or genetic information, age (40 and older) , marital or familial status,
sexual orientation, or gender identity. CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate against any
employee or applicant for employment. CONTRACTOR’s action under this Section shall include,
but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or
recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation and
selection for training, including apprenticeship. CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous
places, available to employees and other applicants for employment, notices setting forth the
provisions of this non-discrimination Section.
ARTICLE 13.
LEGAL FEES
In the event either P arty incurs legal expenses to enforce the terms and conditions of this
Agreement, the prevailing P arty is entitled to recover reasonable attorney's fees and other costs
and expenses, whether the same are incurred with or without a lawsuit.
ARTICLE 14.
JURISDICTION, VENUE AND NONWAIVER
It is agreed that this Agreement shall be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of
Idaho. In the event of litigation concerning it, it is agreed that proper venue shall be the District
Court of the Second Judicial District of the State of Idaho, in and for the County of Latah. Failure
of CITY to exercise any of the rights under this Agreement, or breach thereof, shall not be deemed
to be a waiver of such right or a waiver of any subsequent breach.
ARTICLE 15.
SPECIAL WARRANTY
CONTRACTOR warrants that nothing of monetary value has been given, promised or implied as
remuneration or inducement to enter into this Agreement. CONTRACTOR declares that no
improper personal, political or social activities have been used or attempted in an effort to influence
the outcome of the competition, discussion, or negotiation leading to the award of this Agreement.
Any such activity by CONTRACTOR shall make this Agreement null and void. CONTRACTOR
further warrants that all materials and goods supplied under this Agreement shall be of good
merchantable quality and that all services will be performed in a good skillful manner.
CONTRACTOR acknowledges that it will be liable for any breach of this warranty.
ARTICLE 16.
COMMUNICATIONS
Such communications as are required by this Agreement shall be satisfied by mailing or by
personal delivery to the Parties at the following address:
--- Page 28 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 6 OF 8
CONTRACTOR: CITY:
Company Name City of Moscow
Authorized Agent Engineering Division
Street Address 206 East Third Street
City, State, Zip PO Box 9203
Moscow, ID 83843
ARTICLE 17.
NON-APPROPRIATIONS
This Agreement is contingent upon CITY receiving the necessary funding to cover the obligations
of CITY. In the event that such funding is not received or appropriated, then, and in that event,
CITY’s obligations under this Agreement shall cease and each Party shall be released from further
performance under this Agreement without any liability to the other P arty, and CONTRACTOR
shall be entitled to receive just and equitable compensation for any work satisfactorily completed
hereunder.
ARTICLE 18.
APPROVAL REQUIRED AND SEVERABILITY
This Agreement shall not become effective or binding until approved by CITY . The terms of this
Agreement shall be deemed severable. If any part of this Agreement is held invalid or
unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remaining portions of the Agreement will,
nevertheless, remain in full force and effect so long as the remainder of this Agreement is capable
of completion.
ARTICLE 19.
DRUG/TOBACCO FREE FACILITIES
All CITY facilities are drug and tobacco free facilities. Any drug and/or tobacco use (smoked or
smokeless) is prohibited at all times on all areas of CITY facilities.
ARTICLE 20.
HEADINGS, TITLES AND CAPTIONS
Headings, captions, and titles of sections of this Agreement are for the convenience of reference
only, and are not intended to define, limit, or describe the scope or intent of any provision of this
Agreement, and shall not affect the construction of any provision of this Agreement.
ARTICLE 21.
EXECUTION
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said CONTRACTOR and CITY have caused this Agreement to be
executed on the day and year first above written.
--- Page 29 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 7 OF 8
This Agreement may be executed by the use of electronic signatures pursuant to Idaho Code
§28-50-107, which has the same force and effect as a handwritten signature. If electronic
signatures are utilized, the acknowledgement before a notary is not required.
I, Authorized Agent, certify under the penalty of perjury pursuant to the law of the State of
Idaho, that the foregoing is true and correct and that I am an authorized agent to bind Company
to this Agreement. If I am signing this document utilizing a digital signature, I understand that
my digital signature is valid and binding upon me to the same force and effect as a handwritten
signature.
CONTRACTOR: CITY:
Company City of Moscow, Idaho
________________________________ ________________________________
Authorized Agent Hailey Lewis, Mayor
ATTEST:
________________________________
Laurie M. Hopkins, City Clerk
Approved as to Form:
________________________________
Mia Bautista, City Attorney
--- Page 30 ---
February 2026
CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT – COMPANY
PROJECT NAME PAGE 8 OF 8
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
STATE OF _________________)
) ss.
COUNTY OF _______________ )
On this _______ day of ___________________, 2026, before me, a Notary Public in and for said
State, appeared Authorized Agent, known to me to be the person named above and acknowledged
that they executed the foregoing document as the duly authorized representative for Company .
________________________________________
Notary Public for the State of ________________
Residing at_______________________________
My commission expires_____________________
--- Page 31 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
00 01 00 - 1
7/31/2026
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES
STATE OF ( )
COUNTY OF ( )
Pursuant to the Idaho Code, Title 63, Chapter 15, I the undersigned, being duly sworn, deposes and
certify that all taxes, excises and license fees due to the State or its taxing units, for which I or my
property is liable then due or delinquent, has been paid, or arrangements have been made, before
entering into a contract for construction of any public works in the State of Idaho.
Name of Contractor
Address
City and State
By
Authorized Representative
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2026
NOTARY PUBLIC, residing at
Commission expires
--- Page 32 ---
MISCELLANEOUS FORMS 1 of 2
s:\facilities\archengsvcs\specmst\frontal\miscform.ref.doc
MISCELLANEOUS FORMS BY REFERENCE
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE:
By Reference
The printed form, Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance
, standard form
of The American Institu te of Architects, A.I.A. Doc. G 715, Current Edition, included herein by
reference, or insurance company's standard a pproved form, together with one (1) duplicate copy
of all applicable insurance policies covered by cer tificate shall be provided to the Architect by
the Contractor to whom a contra ct is awarded within ten (10) calendar days after execution of
Contract Agreement, and prior to any work being done on the project by the Contractor.
Forms will be provided by the Architect and four (4) copies shall be executed by an insurance
company duly authorized to c onduct business in the State of Idaho, and satisfactory to the
Owner.
Upon compliance with insurance re quirements, and when properly executed, same shall become
a part of the contract documents.
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
:
By Reference
The printed form, Certificate of Substantial Completion
, standard form of the American Institute
of Architects, A.I.A. Doc. G704, Current Ed ition, shall, upon completion of the work, be
furnished by the Architect to th e Contractor, and, when properly executed by all pa rties thereto,
shall identify the contract wa rranty period and the Owner's obligations upon acceptance of the
work.
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS
:
By Reference
The printed form, Contractor's Affida vit of Payment of Debts and Claims
, standard form of The
American Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Doc. G706, Current Edition, is included herein by
reference and shall apply to the contract.
Same shall be furnished by the Architect to th e Contractor, and when properly executed shall
become a part of the contract documents.
--- Page 33 ---
MISCELLANEOUS FORMS 2 of 2
s:\facilities\archengsvcs\specmst\frontal\miscform.ref.doc
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS
:
By Reference
The printed form, Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens
, standard form of The American
Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Doc. G706A, Current Edition, is included herein by reference and
shall apply to the contract.
Same shall be furnished by the Architect to th e Contractor, and when properly executed shall
become a part of the contract documents.
CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT
:
By Reference
The printed form, Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment
, standard form of The American
Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Doc. G707, Current Edition, is in cluded herein by reference and
shall apply to the contract.
Same shall be furnished by the Architect to th e Contractor, and when properly executed shall
become a part of the contract documents.
END OF MISCELLANEOUS FORMS SECTION
--- Page 34 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
01 10 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Work under other contracts.
3. Use of premises.
4. Owner's occupancy requirements.
5. Work restrictions.
6. Specification formats and conventions.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: City of Moscow – Moscow East City Park Stage Replacement
1. Project Location: 900 E Third Street, Moscow, ID 83843
B. Owner: City of Moscow
1. Owner's Representative: David Schott
C. Architect: Design West Architects
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. The Work includes all labor and material to complete the work included in the Contract
Documents for the project.
2. The contractor shall include all necessary costs to complete and achieve the work shown.
Existing construction documents for the previous construction of the Restrooms are
available for review by contractors. Conditions that are apparent, reasonably inferable, or
disclosed in the available documents shall not be considered “unforeseen conditions” as
basis for contractor claims for cost or time extensions.
1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS or by OWNER
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work
of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited by:
1. Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
2. Other limitations contained in articles below
3. Contractual schedule restrictions for completion of portions of the work to allow Owner
occupancy of portions of the Site.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to comply with the requirements of the
Contractual Schedule defined in the article(s) below.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site as defined below.
a. Allow for Owner’s continual occupancy of the remainder of the site
b. Access to existing site improvements and road entries on the project site
c. Work by Others and Work by Owner’s own forces.
d. Construction operations to be limited to areas and timing coordinated with the
owner.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Promptly repair any damage. Keep driveways and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
Access to Site: Limited to the routes and areas designated by the Owner’s
representative, and permitted by the authorities having jurisdiction.
--- Page 35 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
01 10 00 - 2
7/31/2026
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
c. Schedule deliveries to minimize disruption to the Owner’s operation of the
surrounding Park
4. Time Restrictions for Performing Work in areas impacting utilities or the Owner’s use of
other portions of the building and site shall be coordinated with the Owner in advance of
any work being performed. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 14 days advanced
notice of any work impacting site functions.
5. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted in the Park.
6. Pedestrian and Vehicle protection and coordination may be required. Submit a plan to
City for approval.
7. The contractor must keep within the property lines of the site, this designated staging
area shall be for Contractor use. Contractor shall be responsible for its safety and
security. Any additional staging area shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Owner will continue to operate and occupy the portions of the Site outside the designated
areas. The contractor will coordinate and limit their work to allow the Owner the full use of
those areas.
B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the project, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Contractor shall obtain a Certificates of Occupancy as required from authorities having
jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during normal business working hours
of 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Early Morning and Late Evening Hours: restrictions in accordance with regulations by
authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work. Request permission from
Owner and Authorities having Jurisdiction to work outside normal work hours
2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Provide two weeks advance request and notice of intended
utility shut downs during the time that the Owner is occupying the adjacent facilities.
Minimize the duration of any utility outage that affects the Owner’s facilities.
3. Work hours also are to comply with the local City Ordinances and requirements.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C. Coordinate noisy construction operations that will impact the use of the remainder of the
building. Coordinate these items with the owner during construction.
D. Any and all pets and animals are not permitted on the project site at any time.
--- Page 36 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
01 10 00 - 3
7/31/2026
1.7 DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. The Contract Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, are complementary and
what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. Work shown or required by any
portion of the contract documents shall be provided by the contractor.
B. Organization of the Specifications and Drawing keynotes into divisions, sections and articles,
and the arrangement and numbering of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the
Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by a trade.
The General Contractor is solely responsible for assigning work among various subcontractors
and trades; the General Contractor is ultimately responsible for all work under the contract.
C. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross -
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers
are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
D. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
1.8 CONTRACTUAL PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE
A. The contractor shall plan and execute the work to comply with the following schedule:
1. 151 calendar days from day of Notice to Proceed. Includes all the work of the project.
Reference the drawings for area and work.
2. The 1 year warranty period shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion
3. Project Final Completion shall be achieved within 30 consecutive calendar days following
the issuance of Substantial Completion. Reference specification 01 77 00 and the
Owner-Contractor Agreement for Project Closeout and Final Completion requirements.
B. Liquidated damages shall begin and accrue from the failure to meet any of the deadlines
defined in the project schedule above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
--- Page 37 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
01 23 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Submission procedures.
2. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly
integrate the Work of each Alternate and to provide complete construction
required by the Contract Documents.
1.3 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVES
A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be accepted or rejected under the provisions
of Document A701, Instructions to Bidders, Subparagraph 5.3.2.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
Alternate No. 1: Dancers Plaza
The Base Bid shall include all finished grading to allow for landscaping by the Owner
Provide an ADD Alternate price to complete the concrete Dancers Plaza defined in the
Construction Documents.
Alternate No. 2: Service Panelboard With 400A Main Breaker
The Base Bid shall include all new electrical work shown in the Construction Documents
from (E) 200A panelboard A
Provide an ADD Alternate price for the additional electrical service work to the 400A
panelboard MP
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - not used.
END OF SECTION 01 23 00.
--- Page 38 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 26 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
--- Page 39 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 26 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work requir ed by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
--- Page 40 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 29 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Sub-schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of
payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for
operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents,
and demonstration and training.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
--- Page 41 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 29 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified,
include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for each division of work,
separating material and labor costs under each division.
9. Provide separate line item in the Schedule of Values for project closeout. Value of
project closeout shall be 0.5% of the contract amount or $10,000, whichever is greater.
10. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: The Owner’s payment process “cut off dates” will be provided to
the contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on
the last day of the month.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.
Sample copies are included at end of this Section.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders (and Construction Change Directives— if used)
issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
G. Maximum billing amount of 95% that Owner will allow for:
1. Operable equipment and systems pending demonstration of full function.
2. Landscape and Irrigation
3. Site Equipment
4. Overhead Coiling Doors
5. Miscellaneous Equipment
6. Food Service Equipment
7. Plumbing Equipment
8. HVAC Equipment
9. HVAC Controls
10. Fire Protection
11. Service Voltage Equipment
12. Low Voltage Equipment and Instrument
13. Telecommunications
--- Page 42 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 29 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
H. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract
and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Performance and payment bonds.
15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
17. Labor and Industries required Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage statements.
L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 95 percent completion for portion of the
Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
--- Page 43 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 29 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
M. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Labor and Industries required Affidavit of Prevailing Wage Paid statements.
10. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
--- Page 44 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Project meetings.
4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different sections,
that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
5. Coordinate sequence and space requirements above the ceiling for lighting, power,
telecommunications, fire alarm, fire sprinkler, plumbing and fire sprinkler lines. Provide
all necessary support and coordination to allow installation of above ceiling utilities within
the available space between structural members and the ceilings heights indicated in the
drawings.
B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible;
coordinate work of various contractors having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connection to, and providing service, for such equipment
C. Coordinate space requirements and concealed installation of mechanical and electrical work
which are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Following routing shown for pipes, ducts,
and conduits, as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs
D. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements
E. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
--- Page 45 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
G. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial and complete submittals shall be received no later than 30 days after the Notice to
Proceed for review and comment. Failure to comply with this deadline shall constitute breach of
contract, and shall be subject to liquidated damages.
B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities .
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate required installation sequences.
c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit PDF and three copies of each submittal. Architect, will return
one copy.
a. Electronic submittal copies to be considered. Final determination to be made at
Pre-Construction meeting.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
C. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned
to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to full-time project superintendent, provide other administrative and
supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
2. General Superintendent – this individual will represent the general contractor primarily,
and will be responsible for coordination of contractors, safety, technical aspects of the
construction, maintenance of the schedule, generation of Requests for Information and
similar duties. This individual will be responsible for pre-installation meetings,
--- Page 46 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
maintenance of as-built drawings, shop drawing and submittal coordination and
distribution, monitoring and logging of site visits, and other functions typical of a Quality
Control Officer. This position will also be responsible for coordination with subcontractors
and vendors.
3. Contractor’s staff shall be responsible for computer generated (e-mail), phone, job-site
filing, correspondence, distribution of minutes, drafts of pay applications and generally
ensures that the job office is staffed during the normal work week hours of operation.
4. The contractor may distribute the duties among their personnel in any manner acceptable
to the owner.
5. The contractor must provide the name and phone number of a designated local
employee or resident who is generally available evenings and weekends to respond to
emergencies on the job-site. This is not an on-call position, but the phone number must
be provided with an answering machine / voicemail to ensure a timely response.
6. Inform Architect and Owner, in writing, of the name, address and telephone of the
designated local employee.
1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within five days
of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Architect/ Engineer will administer preconstruction conference for execution of Owner -
Contractor Agreement, clarification of Owner and Contractor responsibilities in use of
site, review of administrative procedures, and exchange of preliminary submittals
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of Record Documents.
l. Use of the premises and existing building.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office, work, and storage areas.
--- Page 47 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
u. Security.
v. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
4. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Progress & Coordination Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at approximately weekly
intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Contractor shall Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
--- Page 48 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will
be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
3. Submit each RFI with the cover tracking transmittal form provided at the end of this
section
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: Cover transmittal form at end of this Section.
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as
indicated above.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log monthly:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
--- Page 49 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
--- Page 50 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00.1 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
Design West Architects Job Site
254 E. Main Street
Pullman, WA 99163
509-***-**13
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION TRANSMITTAL
PROJECT: City of Moscow –East City Park Stage Replacement DWA #25101
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT: Design West Architects
STRUCTURAL: LSB Engineers
ELECTRICAL: MSI Engineers
CIVIL: Syntier Engineering
ITEM:
REF DWG OR
SPEC:
RFI
NO.
ROUTING
COMPANY /
CONTACT SENT DATE
#
PAGES DATE AP = Approved DIS = Disapproved OTH = Other
FROM: FAXED REC'D ACTION COMMENTS
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
REMARKS /
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS /
OTHER ROUTING:
(PLEASE
DATE AND
INITIAL ANY
COMMENTS)
Note: THIS
TRANSMITTAL
SHALL
REMAIN WITH
--- Page 51 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 31 00.1 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
RFI AT ALL
TIMES
--- Page 52 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Field condition reports.
7. Special reports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
--- Page 53 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.
1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of
Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.
D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network
for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)
and date on label.
F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start
date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the
Work until most recent Application for Payment.
G. Daily Construction Reports: Allow Owner and Architect to review Daily Construction reports
upon request.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, area separations and partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
--- Page 54 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time
for manufacture or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule,
instead of tabulating them separately.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 14 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
--- Page 55 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced
or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion, and the
interim milestones defined in Section 01 10 00.
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall
not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's
approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required
principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and
maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and
demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract
Sum.
3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect.
4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically
to manage construction schedules.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice
to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction.
--- Page 56 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction
based on indicated activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized time- scaled
CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not
excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays
incorporated into the schedule.
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing and commissioning.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as
necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start -total
float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
--- Page 57 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative
dollar value.
3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed
as of list date.
4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with
progress meetings.
a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative
value completed" with total at bottom.
b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled
progress meeting.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial Completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
--- Page 58 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 32 00 - 7
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need- to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
--- Page 59 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 33 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Construction progress schedules.
2. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.
3. Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.
4. Manufacturers’ instructions.
5. Manufacturers’ certificates.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Progress Schedules shall be a computer-generated Critical Path Method
schedule. This CPM schedule will consist of and provide the following:
1. Diagrams which show elements of project in detail and in summary.
2. Diagrams which show order and interdependence of construction
activities and sequence in which work is to be accomplished as planned
by Contractor.
3. Detailed network activities which include, in addition to the construction
activities, the following items:
a. Submittal and approval of submittals required under Division 01.
b. Procurement of critical materials and equipment.
c. Fabrication of special material and equipment, their installation,
and testing.
d. Activities of the Owner and Architect which affect progress.
4. Selection and number of activities are subject to Architect’s review and
approval. CPM network activities should coordinate with Payment
Request form and Construction Progress Chart.
5. Detailed network diagrams which are time scaled by month or week.
6. Sheet size of diagrams which are of sufficient size to be easily read and
understood. Each monthly updated copy shall show date of latest
revision.
7. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements for
Construction Progress Schedules may be grounds for a determination by
the owner that the contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient
diligence to insure completion within the time specified in the Contract.
Upon making this determination, the Owner may terminate the
Contractor’s right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in
accordance with the default provisions of this Contract.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FOR SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES
A. Submit a complete list of Required Submittals, on a SUBMITTAL TRACKING
SCHEDULE, to be provided by the architect, at or within 5 days of pre-
construction meeting. The list is to identify all submittals required by the
specification sections. Individual submittals are to be numbered as outlined in
Paragraph C, below.
B. Transmit each submittal with a SUBMITTAL FORM, provided at the end of this
Section, to the office of the Architect.
C. Each submittal form shall be cross-referenced with the submittal number.
Submittal numbers shall be in the following format:
1. All number shall be seven digits.
--- Page 60 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 33 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
a. The first five numbers shall reflect the specification section
number (i.e. Section 04 34 00 submittals number shall begin with
“04 34 00”.)
b. The next two numbers shall make the particular submittal unique
(i.e. the eighth submittal in Section 04 34 00 shall be “04 34 00 -
08”.
2. Resubmittals shall to have original number with a numeric / alphabetic
suffix. (i.e. first resubmittal would be “04 34 00 -08-R1” the second
resubmittal would be “04 34 00 -08-R2).
D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet
and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.
E. Apply Contractor’s stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and
coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work
and contract Documents. Any submittal, shop drawing, product data, or sample
that does not bear the Contractor’s approval stamp shall be returned without
review.
F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business
address. All submittals are required to be submitted to the Architect on
acceptable format as outlined herein within thirty (30) days after award of
Contract. Coordinate submission of related items. See related sections as
outlined in paragraph 1.2 or this Section.
G. Identify variation form Contract Documents and Product or system limitations
which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
I. Shop drawings, product data, etc. shall be submitted in sufficient time to allow
not less than 28 calendar days for the examination of shop drawings by the
Architect:
1. Where two or more submittals are interdependent in nature such that the
Architect cannot fully review one (or more) without the other, no review
shall take place nor shall the 28 day time limit take affect, until all
required interdependent submittals have been submitted.
J. The submittal notes and review does not authorize any increase in cost for the
item, installation or related coordination.
K. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since
previous submittal.
L. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Submit two prints on bond paper and one print on transparent
reproducible media (sepia, vellum, or mylar). The two bond paper prints
shall be retained by the architect/consultants, the contractor shall be
responsible for reproduction of sufficient copies of reviewed shop
drawings for the requirements of this contact and his own uses.
2. Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and
other data applicable to the Project. Supplement manufacturers’
standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
3. Include those requirements as outlined in individual specifications
sections as well as any special coordination requirements.
B. Samples:
1. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires to be returned to
him, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect and professional
consultants.
--- Page 61 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 33 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturer’s
standard colors; custom colors; and / or texture and patterns as specified
in individual specification sections for Architect’s selection.
3. Include full project identification on each sample.
C. After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures
above and per Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract
Closeout.
1.5 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and
finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents.
1.6 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s
certificate to Architect for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but
must be acceptable to Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - not used.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00.
--- Page 62 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 33 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
Design West Architects Job Site -
254 East Main Street
Pullman, WA 99163
(509-***-**13
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL / SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PROJECT:
City of Moscow – Moscow East City Park Stage
Replacement DWA #25101
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT: Design West Architects
STRUCTURAL: LSB Engineers
ELECTRICAL: MSI Engineers
CIVIL:
Syntier
Engineering
ITEM: SUBMITTAL NO.
Spec.
Section:
Sequence
Number:
Resubmittal
Number:
REF DWG OR
SPEC:
ROUTING
DATE DATE
SD-SHOP DWG, PD=PRODUCT
DATA, S=SAMPLE, O=OTHER
COMPANY / CONTACT SENT REC'D QTY TYPE COMMENTS
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
FROM:
TO:
REMARKS / SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS / OTHER
ROUTING: (PLEASE DATE AND INITIAL ANY COMMENTS)
Note: THIS TRANSMITTAL SHALL REMAIN WITH SUBMITTAL AT ALL TIMES
--- Page 63 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 40 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Quality Assurance and Control of Installation.
2. References.
3. Field Samples
4. Mock-Up
5. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
6. Manufacturer’s field services and reports.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
quality.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or federal
standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more
rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
C. General
1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services,
site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
2. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in
sequence.
3. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents,
request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
4. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work
except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements
indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
5. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and
sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or
disfigurement.
6. Asbestos:
a. The Contract Documents for this project have been prepared in
accordance with generally accepted professional architectural
and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products
containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this
project. Notify the Architect immediately for instruction if:
1) Materials containing asbestos are brought to the site for
inclusion in the Work.
2) Asbestos materials are encountered in any existing
structures upon which work is being performed.
b. At Architect's direction and with owner's approval, an
independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on
suspect materials.
c. Contractor shall certify that based upon his best knowledge,
information, inspection and belief no building materials
containing asbestos were used in the construction of the project.
Submit certification on form provided by Owner. Sample form
follows this section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on building permit.
--- Page 64 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 40 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference
document.
1.4 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
B. Where field samples are specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear
area after field sample ahs been accepted by Architect.
1.5 MOCK-UP
A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this Section.
B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
devices, flashing, seals and finishes.
C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after
mock-up has been accepted by Architect.
1.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner may appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to
perform inspection and testing.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified
in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance
with Contract Documents.
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
1. Notify Architect and independent firm two (2) working days prior to
expected time for operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall
be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect.
Payment for re-testing will be charged to and paid for by the Contractor.
1.7 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect thirty (30) days in advance of
required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect.
B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start -
up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to
initiate instructions when necessary.
C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturer’s
written instructions.
D. Submit report in duplicate within thirty (30) days of observation to Architect for
review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED
--- Page 65 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 40 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ASBESTOS STATEMENT
Building Name: ___________________________________________________________________
Building Address:
___________________________________________________________________
Building Owner: ___________________________________________________________________
Completion Date:
___________________________________________________________________
As GENERAL CONTRACTOR in charge of construction; based on my best knowledge, information,
inspection and belief; I certify that on the above-referenced building no asbestos containing building
materials were used in the construction.
Date General Contractor in Charge
Company Name
END OF SECTION 01 40 00.
--- Page 66 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 50 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Portable Sewer Service: Contractor shall utilize Owner’s sewer service by all entities for
construction operations when available. When facilities are not available Pay portable sewer
service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Contractor shall utilize Owner’s electric power service for electricity
used by all entities for construction operations. Provide connections and extensions of services
as required for construction operations. Contractor shall conserve power. Owner’s electrical
power may NOT be used for temporary heat.
D. Water Service: Contractor shall utilize Owner’s water service for water used by all entities for
construction operations. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for
construction operations. Contractor shall conserve water.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for protection of each permanent service before Owner's acceptance, regardless
of previously assigned responsibilities. Permanent equipment and systems shall not be used
during the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9 gauge (0.148-inch) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD
line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
D. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.
--- Page 67 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 50 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Office, Contractor: Contractor shall provide contractor prefabricated or mobile units with
serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
Maintain field office until final project acceptance.
B. Field Office Requirements: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner and construction
personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.
3. Provide secure wireless internet: Allow other entities to use internet without cost,
including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Coordinate with serving utility to provide water for construction purposes . At
Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
D. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
--- Page 68 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 50 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Permanent equipment may not be used for
temporary construction period heating or cooling; except where specifically allowed for in
individual specifications sections.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide extensions to electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides 25 foot candle minimum
lighting or additional lighting for adequate illumination for construction operations, observations,
inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install two telephone line(s) for each field office or utilize cell phones if
coverage is acceptable.
1. At job site trailer, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.
I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
1. Provide high speed internet in primary field office and minimum of one computer with e-
mail and internet access in the job-site office.
2. Contractor personnel must have expertise in e-mail correspondence to maintain team
coordination. The Contractor will provide all computer equipment (hardware) necessary
to accomplish this.
3. The contractor must have the capability to provide electronic transfer of documents such
as minutes and spreadsheets through one of the job-site positions. Contractor to provide
a scanner able to scan 11x17 size paper to distribute items as needed.
4. The contractor shall provide the owner with e-mail and document transfer capability with
the Project Manager at the home office of the company, if the Project Manager is not
located at the job-site office
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: The Owner will allow parking in the areas designated in the drawings. These parking
areas are for the use of construction personnel on a first-come, first-served basis. Additional,
parking will only be allowed in areas that the City of Moscow allows parking on streets.
--- Page 69 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 50 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
F. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to mini mize
damage.
G. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. Protect
finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage. Repair any
damage to Owner’s satisfaction
H. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, and on lawn and landscaped
areas.
I. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4 CONTROL, SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B. Provide security program and facilities to protect work, existing facilities, and Owner’s
operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with Owner’s security
program.
C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As necessary to maintain public safety, and to ensure security of the
site. The contractor shall determine the appropriate extent and duration of need for site
security fence. The safety and security of the site is the contractor’s responsibility
throughout the duration of the project through the date of substantial completion.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in all project areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
H. The entire site is a non-smoking area. No drugs, tobacco, alcohol, or weapons of any kind shall
be allowed on the site.
I. No animals, radios or attire with inappropriate or vulgar graphics are allowed on-site.
--- Page 70 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 50 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 50 00
--- Page 71 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature; that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
4. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
a. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid date, or date of Owner -
Contractor Agreement when there are not bids, except when a specific date is
specified
b. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy
at job site during progress of the specific work
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
--- Page 72 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt
of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack
of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract
Documents.
B. Substitution Requests: Provide electronically only. Identify product or fabrication or installation
method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use the form at the end of this section, any other form will be
rejected. Adding qualifications, or otherwise modifying the form shall result in rejection of
the substitution.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors; that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
--- Page 73 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit electronic copy, include the form at the end of this
section. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information
or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Off-site storage within in 10 miles of the project site, complying with the requirements of
the Supplementary Conditions of the Contract is allowed. Contractor may apply for
payment on materials complying with these requirements.
3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
4. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
5. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
--- Page 74 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. All products shall be new
3. Products include material, equipment, and systems
4. Specifications and referenced standards are minimum requirements
5. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be the
same, and shall be interchangeable
6. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
7. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
8. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
9. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
10. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
11. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
--- Page 75 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions
in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at
discretion of Architect.
B. Substitutions:
1. Products specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards
2. Products specified by Naming One or More Manufactures: Submit a Request for
Substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.
3. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer and a statement of No
Substitution: No options, no substitutions allowed
C. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
--- Page 76 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution will be considered only when a product becomes unavailable due
to no fault of Contractor
3. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
4. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
10. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
12. Substitutions will not be considered or allowed when they are indicated or implied on
shop drawing or product data submittals without separate written request, or when
acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
13. Substitutions will not be considered if the form following this section is not included.
14. Architect/Engineer and Owner will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and
will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection in writing within a reasonable time
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents; that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
End of Section 01 60 00
--- Page 77 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 60 00.1 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
Substitution Request (E-mail this form to Chelsea Holstad, Office Manager at: c***@designwestpa.com)
TO___________________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT_____________________________________________________________________________
SPECIFIED ITEM
_______________ ___________ _____________ __________________________________
Section Page Paragraph Description
The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION_____________________________________________________________
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data ade-
quate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will require
for its proper installation.
The undersigned states that he following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct.
1. The Proposed Substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.
2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and
construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
3. The Proposed Substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or speci-
fied warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the Proposed Substitution.
The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent
or superior to the Specified Item.
Submitted By____________________________
Signature_______________________________
Firm___________________________________
Address_________________________________
_______________________________________
Date___________________________________
Telephone_______________________________
Fax____________________________________
Email____________________________________
Attachments:
For use by Design Consultant:
_____Accepted _____Accepted as noted
_____Not Accepted _____Received too late
By_____________________________________
Date___________________________________
Remarks________________________________
END OF SECTION 01 60 00.1
--- Page 78 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 73 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 73 00 – EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of concealed or underground and other utilities
and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
--- Page 79 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 73 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move,
or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for c hanging the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies ar e
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
--- Page 80 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 73 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Provide solid, fire-treated wood frame backing and blocking for all wall or ceiling surface
mounted items, including but not limited to equipment, grab bars, door stops, partitions, railings,
and other accessories. Contractor shall coordinate and verify the locations and installation of
backing and blocking prior to the installation of gypsum board systems.
H. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
--- Page 81 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 73 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for
Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
--- Page 82 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 73 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01 73 00
--- Page 83 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 77 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Project Record Drawings and Documents.
2. Final Project Record Drawings and Documents (As-builts).
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Final Cleaning.
5. Warranties.
6. Closeout Procedures for Substantial Completion.
7. Closeout Procedures for Final Completion.
1.2 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contractor shall continually record factual information regarding all aspects
of the Work, both concealed and visible; to enable future modification of design
to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation and
examination.
B. Contractor shall maintain and continually update one composite set of Project
Record Drawings noting changes, modifications, and field verified
measurements. Submit this set upon substantial completion to the
Owner/Design Team for their use in preparing final as-built drawings on
computer media. Owner and Architect shall continually check the progress and
condition of Project Record Drawings to verify compliance with this requirement.
C. Maintain on site, one set of the following documents; record actual revisions to
the Work (AS-BUILT REVISIONS) concurrent with construction:
1. Project Record Drawings: Record information on a set of Construction
Documents using felt tip marking pens, maintaining a separate color for
each major system. Do not conceal any work until required information
is recorded. Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including, but not limited to:
a. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
b. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground
utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface
improvements.
c. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances
concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible
features of the Work.
d. Field changes of dimension and detail.
d. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
2. Project Record Documents (Project Manual; Digital): Legibly mark and
record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,
including the following:
a. Manufacturer’s name and product model and number.
b. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
c. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
d. Addenda.
3. Project Record Documents (Shop Drawings and Submittals; Digital
Copy) shop drawings, product data, and samples: Shop drawings,
product data and samples are to be included arranged according to the
Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
4. Additional Project Information (Digital)
a. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
b. Field test records.
--- Page 84 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 77 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
c. Inspection Certificates.
d. Manufacturers' Certificates.
D. Store Record Drawings and Documents separate from documents used for
construction. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. Label
document "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS” or " DOCUMENTS".
E. Submit Project Record Drawings and Documents to Architect for review 10 days
prior to Substantial Completion.
1. The Architect will review Project Record Drawings and Documents prior
to Contractor generating final record drawings. Upon request, Contractor
shall participate in review meetings of Project Record Documents, make
required changes, and then submit for final review by the Architect.
2. Upon final review by the Architect, the Contractor shall generate a set of
reproducible Final Project Record Drawings (As-Builts) and Documents
as described below.
1.3 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor is to provide the Owner with one (1) complete set of reproducible
Final Project Record Drawings (As-Builts) and Documents.
1. Final Project Record Drawings (As-Builts).
a. The Architect shall provide the Contractor a set of original
reproducible drawings.
b. The Contractor shall have this set reproduced with the
Architect’s title block and seals deleted from all documents.
c. The Contractor shall transfer all information from the reviewed
Project Record Drawings to this set.
2. Final Project Record Documents: (Reviewed Project Record
Documents).
a. Contractor is to provide the Owner with one (1) complete set of
Final Project Record Documents 8-1/2 x 11 inch text page and
labeled according to Content as follows:
1) Project Manual
2) Shop Drawing, Product Data and Samples
(a) Change orders and other modifications to the
Contract.
(b) Field test records.
(c) Inspection Certificates.
(d) Warranties and Manufacturer’s Certificates.
3. Final Project Record Drawings and Documents shall be submitted prior
to the Contractor’s Final Application for Payment.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Contractor is to provide Digital Copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals 10
days prior to Substantial Completion, for review by the Architect.
1. Manuals shall be titled “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS”, title of project printed on the cover. Internally
subdivide the binder contents with permanent tabbed page dividers,
logically organized as described below; with tab tilting clearly printed
under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. Prepare a Table of Contents for
each volume, with each Product or system description identified type on
24 pound white paper.
2. Manuals are to include:
a. Directory - List names, addresses and telephone numbers of:
1) Architect
2) Contractor
3) Subcontractors
4) Major equipment suppliers
--- Page 85 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 77 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
b. General Information - Provide copies of each of the following:
1) Certificate of Occupancy
2) Lien Releases
3) Consent of Surety
4) Certificates of Insurance
5) Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s One-Year Warranty
6) Extended Warranties required in Individual Specification
Sections
7) Air and water balance reports
8) Certificates
9) Photocopies of warranties and bonds
10) Signed Receipt of Extra Stock Items
11) Signed Form that Operation and Maintenance Instruction
has been completed with Owner’s Representative
12) Certified Completed Punch List
c. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Divisions 2-14 -
Arranged by specification section and for each category, identify
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and Suppliers. Including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Significant design criteria
2) List of equipment
3) Parts list for each component
4) Operating instructions
5) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems
6) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including
recommended cleaning methods and materials and
special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
d. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Division 15 - Arranged
by specifications section and for each category, identify names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers. Including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Significant design criteria
2) List of equipment
3) Parts list for each component
4) Operating instructions
5) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems
6) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including
recommended cleaning methods and materials and
special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
e. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Division 16 - Arranged
by specification section and for each category - identify names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers. Including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Significant design criteria.
2) List of equipment.
3) Parts list for each component.
4) Operating instructions.
5) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including
recommended cleaning methods and materials and
special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 10 days prior to
Substantial Completion. This copy will be returned with Architect
comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to Final
Completion.
4. Final O&M Manuals shall be presented to Architect at Final Completion.
--- Page 86 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 77 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion and, if necessary, provide
additional cleaning in areas of Work prior to Final Completion.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove
temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy
surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
site.
1.6 BUILDING “BAKE-OUT” PRIOR TO OWNER OCCUPANCY – NOT USED
1.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered
operation.
1.8 EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall secure guarantees and/or warranties required for each section of
the work, properly addressed and signed and in favor of Owner. Execute and
assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers as
identified under Final Project Record Documents above.
B. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide
updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as
start of warranty period.
1.9 SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, & EXTRA STOCK ITEMS – NOT USED
1.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. The project will be subject to the City of Moscow’s Certificate of Occupancy. The
Owner’s representatives will review the building for completion of all aspects that
deal with the life/safety of building occupants. This review and certification will
include, but not be limited to, fire detection/alarm systems, fire protection
systems, fire-rated construction assemblies, and associated communications
facilities.
B. Provide the following items:
1. Submit Project Record Drawings and Documents ten (10) days prior to
Contractor’s Request for Substantial Completion.
2. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been
reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect’s review.
3. Submit a list of Project Deficiencies to the Architect 48 hours minimum
prior to Substantial Completion Review.
4. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other
authorities.
5. Owner will occupy all of the building upon satisfactory acceptance of
Substantial Completion.
C. Should status of completion of work require additional review by Architect due to
failure of work to comply with Contractor’s claim of Substantial Completion,
Owner will deduct the amount of compensation for additional review services
from final payment to Contractor.
1.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES FOR FINAL COMPLETION
A. Re-Submit Record Drawings and Documents.
--- Page 87 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 77 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
B. Re-Submit Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals and Instructional Videos.
C. Submit any and all remaining warranty documentation for the work of the project.
D. Submit a certificate of Substantial Completion in the appropriate form
E. Submit Consent of Surety to Final Payment
F. Submit Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
G. Submit Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens
H. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,
previous payments, and sum remaining due.
I. Should status of final completion of work require additional review by Architect
due to failure of work to comply with Contractor's claim of Final Completion,
Owner will deduct the amount of compensation for additional review services
from final payment to Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - not used.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00.
--- Page 88 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 78 23 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes ,
systems and equipment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: PDF copy of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will
return one PDF copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are
acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit one PDF copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 Hard
Copy and 1 PDF copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's
comments.
2. Final PDF document must be book marked for each section.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
--- Page 89 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 78 23 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
--- Page 90 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 78 23 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding rivets where required for
identification. Reference Division 22 specifications.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross -reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
--- Page 91 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 78 23 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
2.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Prepare and submit two identical sets of warranties and bonds
2. Label edge of each binder with printed title “WARRANTIES AND BONDS”, with title of
project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of responsible
principal
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in
which specified, and the name of product or work item
4. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents
listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List
subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number or
responsible principal
5. Obtain full, one-year minimum warranties and bonds and/or actual time required by
specific specification sections, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) days after substantial completion of the
project. Except for items put into use with Owner’s permission, leave date of beginning of
time of warranty until the date of substantial completion and/or continued use by the
Owner is determined
6. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized
7. Co-execute submittals when required
8. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal
9. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
--- Page 92 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 78 23 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
3.2 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
A. Provide instruction of Owner’s personnel in maintenance of products.
END OF SECTION 01 78 23
--- Page 93 ---
Heart of the Arts – 1912 Center 2nd Floor Renovation 01 78 39 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Contractor to submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.
2. Number of Copies: Contractor to submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will
initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return
plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints, and digital copy.
Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were
recorded.
1) Electronic Media: Download Link
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
D. Store Record Documents and Samples in Owner’s Office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any
work until required information is recorded
b. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
c. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
d. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
--- Page 94 ---
Heart of the Arts – 1912 Center 2nd Floor Renovation 01 78 39 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
--- Page 95 ---
Heart of the Arts – 1912 Center 2nd Floor Renovation 01 78 39 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
C. At Contract closeout, deliver submittal Record Documents, and three (3) black line copies, edge
bound in complete sets
D. Transmit submittals with cover letter, listing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor’s name, address, and telephone number
4. Number and title of each Record Document
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
--- Page 96 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 01 80 01 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 01 80 01 - KEYNOTE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and details in these documents have been annotated using a
"Keynoting" system to improve drawing clarity and document coordination. The
first six digits of the keynote indicate the specification section covering the
referenced item. Following a decimal point is a two digit number which serves to
make each keynote unique with architect’s internal noting database.
B. As in other annotation systems, this system is not intended to remove the
contractor's responsibility for submitting a complete and comprehensive bid that
covers all work associated with the Work being bid. While every effort has been
made to ensure that all work covered by keynotes is properly cross-referenced to
a specification section and division, it is not represented to be a comprehensive
list of all the work. All provisions of the Specifications are no less applicable than
they would be in the absence of an integrated keynoting system.
C. Be aware that not all sections of work or portions of work occurring within the
graphic portions of the Contract Documents may have been annotated using the
keynoting system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED.
END OF SECTION 01 80 01
--- Page 97 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 02 41 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 02 41 00 - DEMOLITION
PART 1 - SCOPE
1.1 Section Includes
A. Removal and disposal of Bituminous Surface
B. Removal and disposal of Concrete
C. Removal and disposal of Concrete Curb Type A
D. Removal and disposal of Concrete Curb & Gutter
E. Removal of Structures and Obstructions
1. Removal of buildings, irrigation boxes, pipes, bridges, abandoned utilities, fences, drop
inlets, culverts, and any other structures designated for removal on the Plans or by the
Owner.
1.2 Related Documents
A. ITD’s Standard Specifications Section 200 – Earthwork
1.3 Description of Work
A. This covers the removal of bituminous surface , concrete, concrete curb, structures and
obstructions.
1.4 Regulatory Requirements
A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate clearing work with utility companies.
1.5 Submittals
A. Property Owner Disposal Agreements if required by the Engineer (per 3.6.B.5).
PART 2 MATERIALS – Not applicable to this Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Removal of Bituminous
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all live Utilities from damage.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Exercise care to ensure areas outside the construction limits remain undisturbed.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Complete the removal of Bituminous Surfaces to the limits shown on the Plans and
Specifications or as directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material shall become the responsibility and
property of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Dispose of unusable material outside the construction limits in an approved location in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
4. Dispose unusable material in such a manner that no unsightly appearance will result.
C. Preparations After Removal
1. Crushed rock must be placed along the edge of any vehicle or pedestrian approach
affected by these removals as described in the Plans and Special Provisions or as
directed by the ENGINEER.
3.2 Removal of Concrete
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all live Utilities from damage.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Exercise care to ensure areas outside the construction limits remain undisturbed.
B. Removal and Disposal
--- Page 98 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 02 41 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1. Complete the removal of concrete to the limits shown on the Plans and Specifications
or as directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material shall become the responsibility and
property of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Dispose of unusable material outside the construction limits in an approved location in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
4. Dispose unusable material in such a manner that no unsightly appearance will result.
3.3 Removal of Concrete Curb Type A
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all live Utilities from damage.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Exercise care to ensure areas outside the construction limits remain undisturbed.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Complete the removal of concrete curb ‘Type A’ to the limits shown on the Plans and
Specifications or as directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material shall become the responsibility and
property of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Dispose of unusable material outside the construction limits in an approved location in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
4. Dispose unusable material in such a manner that no unsightly appearance will result.
3.4 Removal of Concrete Curb & Gutter
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all live Utilities from damage.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Exercise care to ensure areas outside the construction limits remain undisturbed.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Complete the removal of concrete curb and gutter to the limits shown on the Plans and
Specifications or as directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material shall become the responsibility and
property of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Dispose of unusable material outside the construction limits in an approved location in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
4. Dispose unusable material in such a manner that no unsightly appearance will result.
3.5 Removal of Structures and Obstructions
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all live Utilities from damage.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Exercise care to ensure areas outside the construction limits remain undisturbed.
4. Satisfactorily restore any damage to existing facilities or structures resulting from
activities by the CONTRACTOR to their original condition at the CONTRACTOR’s
expense.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Complete the Removal of Structures and Obstructions to the limits shown on the Plans
and Specifications or as directed by the ENGINEER.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all removed material shall become the responsibility and
property of the CONTRACTOR.
3. Dispose of unusable material outside the construction limits in an approved location in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
4. Dispose unusable material in such a manner that no unsightly appearance will result.
5. Copies of the disposal agreements with property owners are to be furnished to the
Owner upon request.
--- Page 99 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 02 41 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
C. Salvage
1. Carefully remove all items specified to be salvaged in one piece and take to a place
identified in the Plans or Special Provisions; salvage shall become the property of the
person or organization identified on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
D. Preparations After Removal
1. Fill basements or cavities left by structure removal to the level of the surrounding ground
and, if within the prism of construction, compacted as described in the Plans and
Special Provisions or as directed by the ENGINEER.
E. Traffic Control
1. Do not remove bridges, culverts and other drainage structures under the existing
roadway until satisfactory arrangements have been made for the detouring of traffic.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Use one of the following unit price options as designated on the Bid Schedule. If required and not
listed in the Bid Schedule, the following Bid Items are to be considered incidental to other Bid
Items.
A. Removal of Bituminous Surface: By the horizontal square foot. Includes full compensation
for all materials, labor and equipment necessary for completing the work and all
appurtenances not itemized in the Bid Schedule.
B. Removal of Concrete : By the horizontal square foot. Includes full compensation for all
materials, labor and equipment necessary for completing the work and all appurtenances
not itemized in the Bid Schedule.
C. Removal of Concrete Curb ‘Type A’: By the lineal foot. Includes full compensation for all
materials, labor and equipment necessary for completing the work and all appurtenances
not itemized in the Bid Schedule.
D. Removal of Concrete Curb and Gutter : By the lineal foot. Includes full compensation for
all materials, labor and equipment necessary for completing the work and all appurtenances
not itemized in the Bid Schedule.
E. Removal of Structures and Obstructions : By the lump sum (LS). Includes full
compensation for all materials, labor and equipment necessary for completing the work and
all appurtenances not itemized in the Bid Schedule.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 100 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. The contractor is responsible for ascertaining the existing conditions and the work
required to complete the work of this section satisfactorily.
2. This Section requires the selective removal and salvage or subsequent off-site disposal
of the following
a. Portions of existing building structure and finishes indicated on drawings and as
required to accommodate new work
b. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures
c. Removal and salvage of designated construction and site improvements
d. Identification of utilities
e. Removal and protection of existing fixtures, materials, and equipment items
indicated "salvage."
3. The Owner will remove some loose equipment and stored material in the project area,
prior to the contractor taking possession of the site. All substrates and building
conditions will be maintained in the condition as visible during the bid period; the
contractor shall include all necessary costs to improve or modify the substrates to
achieve the work shown in the construction documents. Contractors shall coordinate with
the finish trades (Finish Flooring, Framing & Gypsum Board, and Suspended Acoustical
Ceilings) to complete all substrate improvement necessary to achieve finish tolerances.
4. Existing construction documents for the previous construction in the Building are available
for review by contractors. Conditions that are apparent, reasonably inferable, or disclosed
in the available documents shall not be considered “unforeseen conditions” as basis for
contractor claims for cost or time extensions. Documents are available for review at the
offices of the Owner, and the Design Team.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner
ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully
remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to
Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm, professional engineer, refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Provide structural shoring plan, stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the
State of Washington. Shoring plan will define required shoring and temporary support for the
work of the project.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
--- Page 101 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 2
7/31/2026
1. Name and address of individual (principal of firm) who will be responsible for the
demolition procedures
2. Description of procedures and procedures that will be used to protect the personnel
involved in the effort
3. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
4. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
5. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
6. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress,
including for adjacent building’s occupants affected by selective demolition operations.
7. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
8. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
9. Identification of hazardous sanitary landfill which will be used for the disposal of the
material, appropriate to the waste stream
D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. Company specializing in
performing the Work of this Section with minimum three (3) years experience
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective
demolition.
2. Comply with E.P.A. and OSHA regulations throughout the work of this section
3. Comply with Clean Air Act (CAA) requirements; Section 608
4. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structure, safety of adjacent structures, dust
control and disposal
6. Obtain required permits from authorities
7. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements
8. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated
materials
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of
items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for
bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However,
minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage o p-
erations prior to start of selective demolition work.
B. Partial Demolition and Removal:
--- Page 102 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 3
7/31/2026
1. Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor
may be removed from structure as work progresses. Storage or sale of
removed items on site will not be permitted.
2. Items to be removed by the Contractor to be retained by the Owner shall
be designated “remove and retain”. Remove to on-site location as di-
rected.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate with Owner’s operations involving move-out, salvage, reclamation and recycling
activities
B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or
structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will
be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within struc ture may
occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demol ition work
C. Partial Demolition and Removal:
1. Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed
from structure as work progresses. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be
permitted
2. Items to be removed by the Contractor to be retained by the Owner shall be designated
“remove and retain”. Remove to on-site location as directed
D. Protections:
1. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel
and general public from injury due to selective demolition work
2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or
work to remain
3. Protect existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during
demolition operations
4. Protect floors and roofing with suitable coverings when necessary
5. Provide temporary weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition
work
6. Provide air and dust proof containment barriers at locations where work occurs, protect
remainder of the building from contamination, or nuisance caused by residual effects of
demolition and construction procedures
7. Remove protections at completion of work
E. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work
F. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. Loose furnishings, fixtures, and minor miscellaneous equipment
G. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
H. Hazardous Materials are present:
1. Inspection and testing for certain materials have been performed. The results are
included within these specifications.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, the Contractor shall immediately
notify the Owner and Architect, and handle them in accordance with all applicable local,
state, and federal regulations, protecting site, workers and surroundings from
contamination
3. If hazardous materials are encountered, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Owner and Architect, and handle them in accordance with all applicable local, state, and
federal regulations, protecting site, workers and surroundings from contamination
4. Identification: It is the Contractor’s responsibility to bring to the attention of the Architect
suspected asbestos-containing materials which may be encountered as the work
--- Page 103 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 4
7/31/2026
proceeds. Architect will notify Owner. Exploratory operations and laboratory tests will be
made by the Owner’s consultant if materials that may contain asbestos are encountered
5. Lead Paint and similar materials: Contractor shall provide lead containing materials
identification, control, containment, abatement and disposal previously identified or
encountered during the course of demolition and construction, included in the Cost of the
Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a program to control lead exposure to workers,
and ensure that no lead exposure occurs to the general public
6. Contractor shall provide and include the cost of containment, temporary storage,
neutralizing and proper disposal of all hazardous materials such as solvents, acids, paint
strippers and cleaners used in the course of performing the Work
7. Contractor shall provide and include the cost of removal and delivery to the Owner of any
PCB-containing fluorescent lamp ballasts encountered during the course of demolition
and construction.
I. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
J. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
2. Coordinate with the fire marshal for removal and relocation of the existing fire department
connection. See the drawings for the temporary fire department connection during
construction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
--- Page 104 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 5
7/31/2026
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed
with removal of the wall.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Contractors are responsible for familiarizing themselves with the condition of the project site
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
C. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain. Provide bypass
connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building.
Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary
during changeover
D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary partitions and barriers to prevent spread of dust, odors and noise.
Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of
dust or fumes to permit continued Owner occupancy of the building. Where selective
demolition occurs, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4-inch studs, with gypsum
wall board on non-demolition side and minimum 2 layers 3-mil plastic sheeting. Seal all
seams with appropriate tape material
3. Protect existing materials, existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, structures and
utilities which are not to be demolished
4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
6. Cover and protect building improvements, furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage
or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been
removed
7. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
8. At locations where demolition or tie-in to existing reinforced concrete structure is
indicated, as-built drawings and x-ray analysis shall be conducted prior to demolition
activities. Demolition and tie-in shall not disturb existing concrete reinforcing steel
E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
--- Page 105 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 6
7/31/2026
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Include all work necessary to complete the new work shown in
all documents within the contract documents, including but not limited to, Architectural,
Hazardous Material Abatement, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical. Work of this
section is not limited to areas indicated in the demolition drawings. Use methods required to
complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Provide services for effective air, soil and water pollution controls and worker protection
as required by authorities having jurisdiction
3. Spread out equipment and materials loads across structure and promptly remove debris
to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing
4. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent spaces and properties. Utilize
demolition procedures that minimize disruption to the surrounding areas and activities.
Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain
protected egress and access at all times. Provide all necessary measures to ensure no
contamination of the existing building systems, including the building air intakes and
exhausts
5. Remove portions of the building indicated using methods as required to provide high
quality substrates for work of subsequent phases. Tolerances within 1/8" of required
substrate for new finishes shall be deemed acceptable for the work of this section.
6. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
7. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
8. For interior slabs, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent
slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible
9. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools
10. Keep work sprinkled with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections
for this purpose
11. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
12. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
13. Cease operations and notify Owner, and Architect/Engineer immediately if safety of
structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until
determination is made for continuing operations
14. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
15. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
16. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
17. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
--- Page 106 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 7
7/31/2026
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner within five miles of the
project site.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
D. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
E. Signage: remove all existing room signage in project area, salvage signage material to the
Owner. Coordinate extents of signage removal and replacement with Signage Schedule in
Section 10 14 00.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove demolished materials
from site promptly.
2. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested or dangerous materials
encountered, per regulatory requirements
3. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
4. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Salvaged Items to be Retained and Re-Used in the Work: Where indicated as "Remove and
Retain," or “Relocate”, carefully remove indicated items, clean, and reuse as indicated on the
drawings and in other sections of the specifications
C. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
D. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7 CLEANING
A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished
materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and
surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start of operations. Repair adjacent construction
or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work
--- Page 107 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
02 41 19 - 8
7/31/2026
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
--- Page 108 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 1
7/31/2026
03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Concrete foundations and floor slab.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for concrete foundation walls.
2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for drainage fill under slab on grade.
3. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
4. Structural and other general notes on the plans.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -
furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Curing compounds.
4. Bonding agents.
5. Adhesives.
6. Semirigid joint filler.
7. Repair materials.
8. Vapor retarders.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in service performance
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Source limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the
same manufacturer
--- Page 109 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 2
7/31/2026
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete,"
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form- facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form- release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap- off metal or glass -fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
--- Page 110 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 3
7/31/2026
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar
supports.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water -soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or
mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A and B. Include manufacturer's recommended
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Available Products:
a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A.
b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15.
c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils.
d. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105.
B. Granular Fill: See drawings.
2.8 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for applicati on
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane- Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18
to 25 percent solids, nondissipating. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19),
Euclid Super Diamond Clear VOX, or equal. Certified by curing compound manufacturer to not
interfere with bonding of floor covering or coatings.
2.9 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non -redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
--- Page 111 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 4
7/31/2026
2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
C. Limit water -soluble, chloride- ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of
cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing high- range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Interior Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: See plans.
2. Slump Limit: 7 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled interior finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
4. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45
B. Foundations: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: See plans.
2. Slump Limit: 7 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50
--- Page 112 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 5
7/31/2026
2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.14 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2. Class B, ¼ inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form- release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
--- Page 113 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 6
7/31/2026
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form- facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on-Grade: Form weakened- plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks. Re- saw all joints with beveled edge blade to ease edges at
all saw-cut joints.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
--- Page 114 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 7
7/31/2026
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high- range water -reducing admixtures to
mixture.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301, 305R and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed- surface
irregularities.
--- Page 115 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 8
7/31/2026
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth- formed finished as-cast concrete on architectural
columns:
1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-
half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout
whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs -on-
grade.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended
slabs.
D. Trowel and Fine- Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin- set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
--- Page 116 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 9
7/31/2026
3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture- retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture- retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project..
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.11 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.
Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
--- Page 117 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 10
7/31/2026
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-
coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4- inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
--- Page 118 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 11
7/31/2026
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Foundation concrete does not require special inspection, but all other concrete shall be
special inspected. Although foundation concrete is not special inspected, concrete
testing as outlined below is required.
B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests
when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory -cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. Test one set of two field-
cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
7. When strength of field- cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.
--- Page 119 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
03 30 00 - 12
7/31/2026
12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply
with the Contract Documents.
C. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of
finishing.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
--- Page 120 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 1
7/31/2026
04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Reinforcing steel.
4. Ties and anchors.
5. Unit Masonry – Perlite insulation in non-reinforced cells.
6. Water Repellent and Efflorescence Control Admixture.
7. Sealer and Graffiti Control.
8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
3. Structural and other notes on plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Samples for Final Selection in the form of small-scale units: For the following:
1. Concrete masonry units showing match to pre-selected colors
D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material
properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and
type designations within standards.
1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'
m) at
28 days.
Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required. Acceptable concrete masonry
unit manufacturers must have five years minimum experience.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Conform to IMIAC when placing masonry in cold weather
--- Page 121 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 2
7/31/2026
D. Conform to IMIAC when placing masonry in hot weather
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with industry standards cold-weather construction
requirements.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:
1. White Block – Spokane
2. Mutual Materials Co.
3. Builders Masonry Products
4. Central Premix – Spokane
5. Amcor
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01
2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
--- Page 122 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 3
7/31/2026
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Provide special shapes for sill, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated in the
construction documents.
3. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi.
4. Weight Classification: Medium weight.
5. All exterior CMU walls to be integral colored and sealed. Colors as selected by Architect
6. All interior CMU walls to be standard gray sealed and painted with color as selected by
Architect.
7. All Interior walls “outside” corners shall be bullnosed units.
8. CMU Schedule: Refers to typical sizes, face pattern and color only. Refer to plans,
sections, and wall types to determine depth, type, and any special required shapes or
configurations.
9. CMU Schedule (dimensions and sizes are nominal):
Type 1 Exterior, ground face, integral color 8x8x16, color No. 1 as selected by Architect
Type 2 Exterior, split face, integral color 8x8x16, color No. 1 as selected by Architect
Type 3 Exterior, ground face scored, integral color 8x8x16, color No. 1 as selected by Ar-
chitect
Type 4 Exterior, ground face, integral color 8x4x16, color No. 1 as selected by Architect
Type 5 Exterior, cast masonry sill
Type 6 Exterior, standard, grey color 8x8x16, to be painted
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
E. Mortar Pigments: None.
F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Water: Clean and Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60, deformed.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90
degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
--- Page 123 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 4
7/31/2026
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene
urethane.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-
inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four
loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
1. Available Products:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
2. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
E. Cleaning Solutions: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials
F. Provide Rheopel Plus Water Repellant and Efflorescence Control Admixture, per manufacturer
recommendations (or approved equal).
G. Provide PROSOCO Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control per manufacturer recommendations (or
approved equal).
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry, use Type S.
2. Mortar Mixing
a. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C270
b. Do not use antifreeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Bond beams and lintels: 2000 psi strength at 28 days; 7-8 inches slump, premixed type in
accordance with ASTM C94
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143
--- Page 124 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 5
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
C. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. Preparation
1. Supply metal anchors for placement. Direct correct placement
2. Obtain door frames and related embedded anchors. Verify items provided by other
sections of work are properly sized and located
3. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance
4. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install all masonry material in compliance with Industry Standards and as indicated and shown
in the construction documents.
B. Install all masonry material in compliance with weather conditions.
C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
D. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
E. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
G. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
H. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
I. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
--- Page 125 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 6
7/31/2026
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/32 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay masonry in running bond or as
indicated on Drawings.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Tool exposed exterior mortar joints to be recessed – not concave.
D. Tool exposed interior joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
--- Page 126 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 7
7/31/2026
3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Protection
1. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by
construction activities
2. Provide protection without damaging completed work
3. At day’s end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration
E. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them
with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
3. Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing
4. Fill all reinforced cells with grout
--- Page 127 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
04 22 00 - 8
7/31/2026
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C780. Test mortar for
compressive strength.
F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM 1019.
END OF SECTION 04 20 00
--- Page 128 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
05 50 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe
sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other
items indicated to be built into unit masonry.
3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
2. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded [nosing] [and] [tread].
D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
E. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5
years documented experience
2. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5
years documented experience
B. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
C. Perform work in accordance with AISC-Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel
(AESS) where finished work will be exposed to view.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
--- Page 129 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
05 50 00 - 2
7/31/2026
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
E. Acceptance: Metal fabrications exposed to view shall be of the highest quality and in
accordance with applicable portions of AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) -
Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS). Quality of appearance shall
be grounds for acceptance or rejection of the work of this section, decisions regarding
appearance quality shall be at the discretion of the architect / engineer. Work that is rejected on
the grounds of appearance shall be repaired or replaced with no additional cost to Owner.
F. Mock-up:
1. Erect sample mock-up installation for each fabrication type to be installed on the project,
include supports, rails, panels, characteristic patterns, and accessories. provide the
following:
a. Gutter support bracket, coordinate with Division 07 Gutters
2. Do not proceed with purchase, fabrication or installation of multiple items until mock -up
has been accepted.
3. Locate where directed. Coordinate as necessary
4. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Mock-up
may remain as part of the Work
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or
ASTM A 283, Grade C or D.
E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
--- Page 130 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
05 50 00 - 3
7/31/2026
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
H. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
locations concealed inside of exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening
aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
J. Sammy wood screw, ½” , minimum embedment into wood 2”.
K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
M. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying
with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Available Products:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.
b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
--- Page 131 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
05 50 00 - 4
7/31/2026
c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20. If painting work occurs within the interior of the building, paint
shall comply with VOC limits stated in Section 01 81 14.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. If painting
work occurs within the interior of the building, paint shall comply with VOC limits stated in
Section 01 81 14.
F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with
ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications.
H. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Workmanship:
1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and
thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions
shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.
Use type of materials shown or specified for various components or work
2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless
otherwise shown. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing
grain separation or otherwise impairing work
B. Form exposed connection with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not show, socket type flat -head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Provide sufficient backing at screw locations to cover at least
three threads
C. Provide for anchorage of type suitable for use with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use
D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
E. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
F. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
G. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
H. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
I. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
--- Page 132 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
05 50 00 - 5
7/31/2026
J. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
L. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to
receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop
Drawings.
D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
--- Page 133 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with treated and untreated dimensional lumber.
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3. Wood blocking, backing, furring, nailers and grounds in equipment bases, walls and
ceiling for support of all wall and/or ceiling mounted equipment, fixtures, railings, grab
bars, doorstops and miscellaneous surface mounted items.
4. Pre-fabricated connectors
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include
physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to
ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.
C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Engineered wood products.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Powder-actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
--- Page 134 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 2
7/31/2026
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Lumber products included in the finished project, shall comply with the VOC requirements
stated in section 01 81 14.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and
provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry
or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS – NOT USED
--- Page 135 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 3
7/31/2026
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent
B. Interior framing: see structural drawings.
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
3. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Northern species; NLGA.
5. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: see structural drawings:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, see structural drawings.
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
3. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Northern species; NLGA.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal
thickness.
B. Wall backing for future wall mounted installations: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, 3/8-inch nominal thickness.
C. Plywood and sheathing products included in the finished project, shall comply with the VOC
requirements stated in section 01 81 14
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
--- Page 136 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 4
7/31/2026
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
B. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.
C. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch
above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and
adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.
D. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.
1. Width: 3/4 inch.
2. Thickness: [0.050 inch
3. Length: 16 inches.
E. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band
joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, ]nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not splice members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c
--- Page 137 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 5
7/31/2026
2. Coordinate installation of Concealed Backing, Flooring, Grounds and Cants with other
work.
F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close
furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space
below partitions.
G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable
2. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with
wood filler.
3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Provide solid wood blocking, backing, furring, nailers and grounds in equipment bases, walls
and ceiling for support of all wall and/or ceiling mounted equipment, fixtures, railings, grab bars,
doorstops and miscellaneous surface mounted items.
B. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
C. Provide solid fire treated wood blocking or sheathing backing for all wall mounted equipment,
chalkboards, tackboards, shelf standards, wall cabinets, mirrors, toilet accessories, partitions,
panels shelving, casework, fixtures, door stops, etc.
D. At existing framed wall and ceiling construction, install solid fire treated wood blocking for all
equipment, chalkboards, tackboards, shelf standards, wall cabinets, mirrors, toilet accessories,
partitions, panels shelving, casework, fixtures, door stops, etc. Remove existing finishes as
necessary to install solid blocking and/or backing. Patch back finishes to match existing
adjacent surfaces.
E. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
--- Page 138 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
06 10 00 - 6
7/31/2026
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
--- Page 139 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho
06 18 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 06 18 00 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Glue laminated wood beams, architectural appearance grade with exte-
rior rated glues and finishes
2. Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
B. System Description
1. Design Loads: Per structural calculations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction.
B. ANSI A190.1 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
C. ASTM A 36 - Specification for Structural Steel.
D. ASTM D 2559 - Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Prod-
ucts for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.
E. ASTM A 307 - Specification for carbon steel, bolts, and studs 60,000 psi mini-
mum tensile strength.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01.
B. Indicate sizes and spacing of members, cambers, bearing and anchor details.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated
structural units with three years minimum experience, and certified by the
AITC in accordance with ANSI A190.1.
2. Erector: Company specializing in erection of glue laminated structural
units with five years experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to I.B.C. for loads, seismic zoning, and other load criteria.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 01.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 01.
C. Protect members in accordance with AITC requirements for individually wrapped
material.
D. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - not used.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine lumber conforming to grading rules and
the following values:
1. Bending (Fb):
a. GluLam Beams Fb: 2400 psi.
2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft):
a. GluLam Beams Ft: 1100 psi.
--- Page 140 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho
06 18 00 - 2
7/31/2026
3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc):
a. GluLam Beams Fc: 1650 psi.
4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom (Fcl):
a. GluLam Beams Fcl: 650 psi.
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Top (Fcl):
a. GluLam Beams Fcl: 650 psi.
6. Horizontal Shear (Fv):
a. GluLam Beams Fv: 265 psi.
7. Modulus of Elasticity (E):
a. GluLam Beams E: 1.8 x 106 psi.
B. Adhesive: ASTM D 2559 - For wet condition of service.
C. Sealer - Penetrating surface sealer suitable for site finish per division 09.
D. Grade: architectural appearance grade with exterior rated glues and finishes
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A 36 - Weldable quality, shop primed
painted.
B. Thru-Bolts: ASTM A-307 Steel
C. Hardware: ASTM A 325 - Structural quality steel; shop primed painted.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 Steel.
E. Bearing Plate Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Ex-
pansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to slid masonry or concrete.
F. Protective Paper Wrap: 30 lb. Asphalt - impregnated building paper.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC architec-
tural grade.
1. Provide architectural grade for exposed locations (exterior and interior).
2. Provide structural grade for concealed locations.
B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
C. Cut and fit component parts accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
D. Fabricate member with camber only where specified by Structural Engineer.
E. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without per-
mission.
F. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and
ground smooth.
G. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC re-
quirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that supports are ready to receive trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing and support items.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.
B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until perma-
nently secured.
--- Page 141 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho
06 18 00 - 3
7/31/2026
C. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthor-
ized modification.
D. Install building paper wrap between ledgers and concrete or masonry walls.
E. Tolerances
1. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION 06 18 00
--- Page 142 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 11 13 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. Install at sub-grade side of retaining walls
and the exterior side of all foundation walls and footings
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ChemMasters Corp.
2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.
4. Henry Company.
5. Karnak Corporation.
6. Koppers Inc.
7. Malarkey Roofing Products.
8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
9. Tamms Industries, Inc.
C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
E. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
F. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. or less.
2.2 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal
thickness 1/4 inch with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621.
--- Page 143 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 11 13 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
C. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by
dampproofing manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve
coverages indicated.
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.
3. Allow 48 hours drying time prior to backfilling.
B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building
interior.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a
minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an
8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5
gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less
than 4 gal./100 sq. ft..
B. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than
1.25 gal./100 sq. ft..
C. Apply from finish grade elevation to bottom of footings
D. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing
material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course.
--- Page 144 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 11 13 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by
protection board manufacturer over cured coating.
2. Install protection course within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is
tacky) to ensure adhesion.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
B. Remove dampproofing materials, including protection board from surfaces exposed to view
after finish grading is complete.
END OF SECTION 07 11 13
--- Page 145 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 07 31 13 – COMPOSITION SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes, Base Bid Roofing
1. Granular surfaced asphalt composition shingle roofing.
2. Ridge vent assembly
3. Moisture shedding underlayment; eave, valley and ridge protection.
4. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels with solar reflectance index
not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on
testing identical products by a qualified testing agency
5. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the U.S. De-
partment of Energy's ENERGY STAR Roof Products Qualified Product
List for steep-slope roof products
6. 40 year manufacturer’s warranty.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM D 224 - Specification for Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic
Felt).
C. ASTM D 228 - Method of Testing Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets and Shin-
gles.
D. ASTM D 2178 - Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Water-
proofing.
E. ASTM D 2822 - Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement.
F. ASTM D 3018 - Specification for Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral
Granules.
G. ASTM A 361 - Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process for Roofing and Siding.
H. NRCA - Roofing Manual.
I. UL 580 - Tests for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
J. UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.
K. 2006 IBC
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance crite-
ria, and limitations.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation required and instal-
lation procedures.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each shingle color for color selection by the Archi-
tect.
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 01.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing Manual.
1. Maintain one (1) copy of document on site.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to applicable code for ASTM D 3018 Class A, UL 580 wind up-
lift for shingle types specified.
C. Mock-Up
1. Provide mock-up of 10 sq ft, including eave protection, underlayment,
--- Page 146 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 2
7/31/2026
shingle installation and associated flashings, under provisions of Division
1.
2. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
D. Contractor performing work of this Section is solely responsible for complete
weather-tightness for this roofing system, and to verify and obtain approval of en-
tire system application with manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
B. Do not install eave edge protection and shingles when ambient temperatures are
below 50 degrees F.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Under provisions of Division 01.
1.7 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
A. Provide extra stock equal to one square in original packaging.
1.8 SPECIAL & EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. Under provisions of Division 01.
B. Upon acceptance through on-site inspection, the manufacturer and installer shall
execute the special warranties following this section.
C. Refer to Roofing Guarantee, following this specification section.
D. Warranty Period – 40 year limited warranty period, non-prorated from date of
Substantial Completion.
E. Wind Warranty – 90 m.p.h.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Elk Product: Prestique High Definition
B. Pabco Product: Premier
C. Owens/Corning Fiberglass Product: Oakridge 40 Deep Shadow
D. Certainteed Product: Approved Equal
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Shingles – Per manufacturer, product series listed. Color to be selected
from manufacturer’s full range.
B. Shingle system shall comply with the following Energy Performance: Provide
roofing system with solar reflectance index not less than 29 when calculated ac-
cording to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing
agency
C. Sheet Materials
1. Ice Shield Membrane: Equal to Ice and Water Shield as manufactured
by Grace Construction Products, .040 mil thickness.
2. General Underlayment: Use 2 layers of 15# asphalt under layment over
all other decking, unless manufacturer recommends other wise. Comply
with manufacturers recommendations and requirements to achieve 40
year warranty for a 3:12 installation.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, hot dipped zinc coated steel minimum
--- Page 147 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 3
7/31/2026
3/8 inch head diameter and 12 gauge shank diameter, 1- 1/4 inch long of suff i-
cient length to penetrate through roof sheathing. Utilize 6 nails per shingle. At
Contractor's option, wide-crown staples may be used on new construction only.
B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphalt type with mineral fiber components, free
of toxic solvents, capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of 75 d e-
grees F and 50 percent RH.
C. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt, type recommended for use in application
of underlayment, free of toxic solvents.
D. Ridge Vent attic venting assemblies:
1. ShingleVent II ridge vent, as manufacturered by Air Vent
2. Peak Filter Vent, as manufacturered by Air Vent
3. Cor-A-Vent Roof 2 Wall vent.
E. Flashing Materials: As specified in Section 07620.
F. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions under provisions of Division 01.
B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to
deck surface.
C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed prior to installing work of this Section.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protec-
tion.
B. Broom clean deck surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Eave Ice Dam Protection
1. Place eave edge and gable edge metal flashings tight with fascia boards.
Weather lap joints 3- 1/2 inches. Secure flange with nails spaced 6 inc h-
es.
2. Provide Ice Shield Membrane above all roof overhangs, and in 48” from
face of building wall below. Provide additional ice shield membrane pr o-
tection in all roof va lleys for a distance 48” out from the centerline of the
valley.
3. Apply ridge protection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protective Underlayment
1. Use eave ridge and valley protection (ice dam) as underlayment over
decking at eaves, ridges and valleys, with two layers of 15# felt over all
other decking.
2. Install protective underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof and weat h-
er lap minimum 6 inches.
3. Weather lap and seal watertight all items projecting through or mounted
on roof.
C. Asphalt Shingles
1. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for war-
ranty listed.
2. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5- 5/8 inch weather expo-
sure.
3. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia.
--- Page 148 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 4
7/31/2026
4. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia.
5. Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles, maintaining 5- 5/8 inch
weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails.
6. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fas-
ten. Extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line
to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley protection.
7. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter
under each individual shingle exposed to weather, to prevent lifting of
any shingles not properly sealed.
8. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting
through roof with weather tight placement of counter flashings.
9. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Division 01.
B. Visual inspection of the Work will be provided by Architect.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 01.
B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
--- Page 149 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 5
7/31/2026
ROOFING GUARANTEE -- CONTRACTOR
The Roofing Contractor guarantees, subject to terms and conditions herein, that during Guarantee Period
he will at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made repairs to or replacements of work as
necessary to correct faulty and defective work, and as are necessary to maintain said work in watertight
condition.
In addition to making the work watertight, the Roofing Contractor shall remove and/or repair blisters,
ridges, flashings, splits and other irregularities which in the opinion of the Roofing Manufacturer’s tec h-
nical representative do not conform to acceptable roofing practices and conditions. These repairs shall
be made prior to expiration of the two (2) year Guarantee Period and to the satisfaction of the Roofing
Manufacturer’s technical representative.
This Guarantee is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
• Specifically excluded from this Guarantee are damages to work and other parts of the buil d-
ing, and to building contents, caused by: 1) lightning; windstorm; b) fire; c) failure of substrate
due to deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; d) faulty construction of parapet walls,
copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and
penetrations of the work; and e) activity on roofing by others including construction contrac-
tors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthor-
ized by Owner.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Guarantee shall be null and void
until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Contractor, and until cost and expense
thereof has been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
• The Roofing Contractor is responsible for work covered by this Guarantee, but is not liable for
consequential damages to building or building contents, resulting from leaks or faults or de-
fects of work.
• During Guarantee Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than the Roof-
ing Contractor, including cutting, patching and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Guarantee shall become
null and void upon date of such alterations, but only to extent the work covered by this Guar-
antee. If the Owner engages the Roofing Contractor to perform said alterations, Guarantee
shall not become null and void, unless the Roofing Cont ractor, prior to proceeding with the
work, shall claim that said alterations would damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably
justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
• During the Guarantee Period, if the original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for,
but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Guarantee shall be-
come null and void upon date of the change, but only to extent said change affects work cov-
ered by this Guarantee.
• The Owner shall promptly notify the Roofing Contractor of observed known or suspected
leaks, defects or deterioration, and shall afford reasonable opportunity for the Roofing Con-
tractor to inspect the work, and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects or deterioration.
• This Guarantee is recognized to be the only Guarantee of the Roofing Contractor on said
work, and is in addition to Roofing Warranty furnished by the Roofing Manufacturer, and shall
not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available
to him in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Guarantee shall not operate to relieve the
Roofing Contractor of responsibility for performance of original work in accordance with r e-
quirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract direc t-
ly with Owner or a Subcontractor with Owners’ General Contractor.
--- Page 150 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 6
7/31/2026
ROOFING WARRANTY -- MANUFACTURER
A careful examination of the completed roof shall be made by the Manufacturer’s representative to de-
termine that required quantities of roofing materials have been used and that roofing materials have been
applied in conformance with contract documents;
The Manufacturer warrants, subject to the limits stated herein, that its roofing when so applied is effec-
tively watertight for a period of forty (40) years despite normal wear and tear by the elements, as well as
warranting it against defects in workmanship or materials; which result in leaks.
The Manufacturer warrants to the Owner that, as set forth below, during a period of forty (40) years from
the date of substantial completion of the single-ply roofing described below, the Manufacturer will at its
own expense, make or cause to be made, any repairs that may be necessary, as a result of defects in
workmanship or materials supplied by the Manufacturer which result in leaks or of normal wear and tear
by the elements which results in leaks, and will maintain said roof in water tight condition free from all
leaks arising from such causes. For purposes of this Warranty, damage to the roof caused by hurricanes,
lightning, tornadoes, gales, hailstorms or other unusual natural phenomena shall not be deemed to be
“normal wear and tear by the elements”.
INCLUSIONS: This Warranty does cover, and manufacturer shall be liable for the following:
• Roofing membrane, membrane flashings, metal flashings, mechanical fastening system, anchors,
adhesives, seaming materials, slip sheets, fabrics, insulations, underlayments, and accessories
furnished by the manufacturer as incorporated into the roof membrane system.
• Replacement of roof insulation and vapor barrier damaged by any leakage and/or failure of the
roof membrane assembly;
• Repair of blisters, buckles, splits, breaks, cracks and seam failures in membrane system.
EXCLUSIONS: This Warranty does not cover, and Manufacturer shall not be liable for the following:
• Metal work, including metal counter flashings not a part of the roof membrane system, and such
damage as may result from application of these materials;
• Any damage to the roof caused by structural defect in, or failure of, the building or defects in, or
failure of, any structural roof deck, or other sheathing material, used as the base over which the
roof and roof insulation is applied;
• Roof damage from special chemical conditions not disclosed to Manufacturer;
• Any damage to the building or contents thereof, except replacement of damaged roof insulation
and vapor barrier as noted under “INCLUSIONS: above;
• Roof damage through use of materials after original installation not furnished by Manufacturer;
• Damage to the roof due to mechanical abrasion or abuse not caused by the Manufacturer.
• Reasonable care and maintenance will be the responsibility of the Owner.
INSPECTION AND REPAIR: During the term of this Warranty, the Manufacturer, its agents or employees,
shall have free access to the roof during regular business hours. Upon written notice by the Owner to the
Manufacturer within four days of the discovery of any leaks in the roofing system, or need of repair of
roof, the Manufacturer shall have ten (10) days to inspect the roof. Following such inspection:
• The Manufacturer, at its own expense shall make such repairs to the roof as area required by the
Warranty.
--- Page 151 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
07 31 13 - 7
7/31/2026
• In case Owner or his agent has notified the Manufacturer in writing that repairs are required and
such repairs are not covered by the Warranty (including repairs required by Owner’s alteration,
extension or addition to the roof) the Owner, after having obtained the Manufacturer’s consent in
writing, shall make or cause to be made, such repairs at Owner’s expense in accordance with
specifications and procedures as established by the Manufacturer and this Warranty shall remain
in effect for the unexpired portion of its original term. If the Owner fails to obtain authorization
from the Manufacturer or if repairs are made by anyone other than the Manufacturer’s authorized
designee, this Warranty with respect to such area shall be automatically terminated.
• In the event the (1) Owner notifies the Manufacturer and has confirmed in writing the need of r e-
pair of roof and (2) the Manufacturer is unable to promptly inspect and repair same, and (3) an
emergency condition exists which requires prompt repair in order to avoid substantial damage to
the Owner, then the Owner may make such temporary repairs as may be essential, and any such
action shall not be a breach of the provision of this Warranty. The Owner will bear emergency
repair expenses.
INSPECTION SERVICE: The Manufacturer agrees to re-inspect the completed roof not earlier than 12
nor later than 24 months after completion of the roofing, and if it is determined that there are leaks in the
roofing, then the Manufacturer shall make, or cause to be made at its own expense, such repairs as are
necessary in the opinion of the Manufacturer, to assure watertight integrity of the roof within the scope of
its responsibility under the terms of this Warranty.
END OF SECTION 07 31 13
--- Page 152 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed Products:
a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
b. Formed sloped roof sheet metal fabrications.
c. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
d. Formed equipment support flashing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for gutter support brackets
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for equipment supports, vents, and other
manufactured roof accessory units.
4. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealants applied at metal flashing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counter
flashings as applicable.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and
in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other
exposed accessories.
--- Page 153 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 2
7/31/2026
3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting
construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories,
unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, and condition of other
construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.
5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide Owner with a warranty stating that metal flashings and Associated sealants will properly
shed water and protect building from physical damage for a minimum period of two years from
date of substantial performance of work, as certified by Architect/Engineer, and that damage
resulting from failure to provide above stated performances will be repaired to satisfaction of
Owner at no additional cost
B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
--- Page 154 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 3
7/31/2026
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4. Color: All exposed sheet metal shall be approved by Architect and match adjacent
material, to be selected from manufacturers full range of colors.
5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or
manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
2. For Zinc: ASTM B 32, 40 percent tin and 60 percent lead with low antimony, as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
--- Page 155 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 4
7/31/2026
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory -
mitered and -welded corners and junctions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Cheney Flashing Company.
b. Fry Reglet Corporation.
c. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
d. Hickman, W. P. Company.
e. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.
f. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
g. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.
h. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick.
3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
4. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials,
special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment
of reglet section ends.
5. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
6. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
7. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
--- Page 156 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 5
7/31/2026
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-
stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size
recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion
joints, expansion-joint covers, [gutter bead reinforcing bars,] and gutter accessories from same
metal as gutters.
B. Reference associated gutter support brackets under Division 05 “Metal Fabrications”. Steel
fabricated gutter supports are in addition to the concealed strap supports specified herein.
1. Gutter Style: reference drawings for profile and sizes. Comply with SMACNA
requirements.
2. Expansion Joints: Built in.
3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
b. Concealed Gutter support straps: 0.022 inch thick, 24” on center.
C. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. Lower portion of each
downspout and custom down spouts at building entries to be tube steel. Reference drawings
for locations and details.
1. Fabricated Hanger Style: reference drawings for profile and sizes. Comply with
SMACNA requirements..
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 18 gauge.
b. Tube Steel: 1/8” thick
2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not
exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated.
Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of
wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate
from the following materials:
1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams.
Fabricate from the following materials:
C. Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
--- Page 157 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 6
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize
use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. Coordinate work with other roofing
trades.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of
underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not
less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-
1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. Coordinate work with
other roofing trades.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where
flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
--- Page 158 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 7
7/31/2026
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre- tin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-
tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Pre-tinning is not required for zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel.
2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with
sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Set gutters in gutter support brackets (reference
Division 05 “Metal Fabrications”) aligned at every-other standing metal roof seam. Attach
gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored concealed straps spaced not more than 24 inches
apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.
2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck.
3. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.
4. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24
inches apart.
5. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart.
Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate
hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 48 inches o.c. in between.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated with base boot
connection to tightline.
D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below
scupper discharge.
E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible,
set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of
roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch
centers.
--- Page 159 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
07 62 00 - 8
7/31/2026
D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at
24-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at
24-inch centers.
E. Insert metal flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges at
maximum 12 inches on center. Seal flashing into reglets with sealant
F. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
G. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-
inch centers.
H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes
that penetrate roof.
I. Counterflash mechanical and electrical items projecting through roofing
J. Provide colored sheetmetal sleeves over mechanical and electrical items projecting through the
roof
3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04 Section
"Unit Masonry."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets as indicated."
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
--- Page 160 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including preparing sealant
substrate surfaces, sealant and expandable backing. This work includes those installations
specified by reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
e. Joints between metal panels.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and
louvers
h. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
i. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and
windows.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for joint sealants
3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board
partitions to reduce sound transmission.
4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements,
walkways, and curbing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water -
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
--- Page 161 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
I. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
K. WSSP Compliance Submittals: Product Data for Credit IEQ 3.1: For sealants and sealant
primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-
month period preceding the commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
2. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
standard specifications and test methods.
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
--- Page 162 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -
sealant manufacturer[ or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
--- Page 163 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1. Acoustical Sealant: 250 g/L
2. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
3. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
4. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
5. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
6. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
7. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Integrally colored sealants, as selected by Architect to match
adjacent materials.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to
ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
Provide products and installations that comply with this requirement in Food Preparation and
Food Serving Areas of the project.
E. Sealant Type #1: Single-Component Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Basis of Design: Dow Corning Corporation; 795
b. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000.
c. GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.
d. Pecora Corporation; 865.
e. Pecora Corporation; 895.
f. Pecora Corporation; 898.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 50.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: Coated glass, anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with
a high-performance coating, galvanized steel.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per
ASTM C 1248.
F. Sealant Type #2: Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Basis of Design: Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 [White] [Clear].
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: Coated glass, anodic aluminum, aluminum coated
with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, ceramic tile.
G. Sealant Type #3: Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Basis of Design: Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2.
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7200.
c. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG.
--- Page 164 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
d. Tremco; Vulkem 227.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
H. Sealant Type #4: Single-Component Self Leveling Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Basis of Design: ChemRex Sonnneborn SL-1
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; equivalent product to basis of design.
c. Sika Corporation, Inc.; equivalent product to basis of design.
d. Tremco; equivalent product to basis of design.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and SL (self leveling).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
I. Sealant Type #5: Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Basis of Design: ChemRex Sonnneborn NP-1
b. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900.
c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 1000.
e. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-901.
f. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100.
g. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 15LM.
h. Tremco; DyMonic.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Sealant Type #6: Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF, for field
applied paint finish.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.5 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a
solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;
with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application
indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281
and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and
complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
sealant.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
--- Page 165 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self -
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
--- Page 166 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 7
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
1. Mask all locations where silicone based sealants are installed. No silicone based sealant
shall be allowed to migrate onto adjacent finished surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.
H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
--- Page 167 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 8
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant
application indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying
with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean
and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
B. Remove any and all sealant material outside of the joint area. Fully remove the sealant material
to allow for a complete and satisfactory installation of other finishes including paint.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior butt joints between metal panels.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #1 or as recommended by the metal wall panel
manufacturer.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints at frames of doors, windows, and louvers.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #1.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in High Moisture and Mildew Areas, between plumbing
fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #2.
--- Page 168 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 07 92 00 - 9
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast -
in-place concrete.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #3 or #5.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast -in-
place concrete slabs.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #4.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic joints between plant -precast
architectural concrete units, exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry,
exterior vertical joints between differing materials.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #5.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings, perimeter joints
between interior ceiling surfaces, interior wall surfaces, trim components, and frames of interior
doors, and windows , interior and exterior sealant-pointed mortar joints in glass unit masonry
assemblies.
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #6.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Acoustical perimeter joints between interior ceiling surfaces, interior
wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows. Install on all walls indicated to receive
acoustical wall insulation (indicated by wall type reference in the drawings)
1. Joint Sealant: Sealant Type #7.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: To match adjacent material color, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full and complete range.
I. Joint-Sealants used in food service areas of the building will be specifically approved by
governing authorities for use in such locations.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
--- Page 169 ---
City of Moscow - East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
SECTION 08 00 00
Door Schedule
MARK LOCATION DOOR FRAME DETAILS HW REMARKS
Size Type Matl Finish Type Material Finish Head Jamb Threshhold GROUP
First Floor
103A Exterior Stair 3'-0" x 7'-0" F HM PT See 08 11 13 HM PT-5 C7/A8.00 C7/A8.00 A7/A8.00 1 See 08 71 00
103B Exterior Ramp 3'-0" x 7'-0" F HM PT See 08 11 13 HM PT-5 C7/A8.00 C7/A8.00 A7/A8.00 1 See 08 71 00
102 Electrical Room 3'-0" x 7'-0" F HM PT See 08 11 13 HM PT-5 C7/A8.00 C7/A8.00 A7/A8.00 2 See 08 71 00
101 Storage Room 3'-0" x 7'-0" F HM PT See 08 11 13 HM PT-5 C7/A8.00 C7/A8.00 A7/A8.00 2 See 08 71 00
100A Stage 4'-0" x 12'-0" F STL PT See 08 11 13 STL PT-5 C9/A8.00 C9/A8.00 A7/A8.00 3 See 08 34 00
100B Stage 4'-0" x 12'-0" F STL PT See 08 11 13 STL PT-5 C9/A8.00 C9/A8.00 A7/A8.00 3 See 08 34 00
ABBREVIATIONS KEY
ALUM Aluminum FRP NA PLAM
CA Clear Anodized FGLS PT STL
CL Clear Finish FV PR ORG
DG Door Grille HO RL OCD
FG Full Glazing HM RF Refinish Door OHC
F Flush MOT SS SG
FF Factory Finish FB WD Wood V
General Notes:
1. Reference Specification 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
2. Reference Specification 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames.
Vinyl Faced
Magnetic Hold Open
Motorized
Plastic Laminate
Steel
Overhead Rolling Grille
OVHD Counter DoorRelite w/ Frame
Field Verify Condition
Fabric Faced
OVHD Coiling Door
Side Sliding Grille
Plastic Laminate Faced
Fiberglass
Not Applicable
Paint Color
Stainless Steel
Hollow Metal
Pair
1
--- Page 170 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 1
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard insulated hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware” for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Division 09 Sections “Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5
inches.
2. For the following items, prepared on Samples about 12 by 12 to demonstrate compliance
with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and
hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.
b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include
separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on
Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors
that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F
above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or
UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
--- Page 171 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 2
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784
E. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 and building code standards for labeled doors
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking.
Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Basis of Design: Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.; Product Imperial
Series Doors, Maxim Series Doors, and CF Series Frames
2. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
3. Basis of Design: Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
9. Kewanee Corporation (The).
10. Mesker Door Inc.
11. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
12. Security Metal Products Corp.
13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
14. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
--- Page 172 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 3
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when
tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
B. Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
a. Width: 1-3/4 inches.
b. 14 gauge construction.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 OVERSIZED METAL DOORS
2.5 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 12 gauge- (thick steel sheet.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates
from same material as frames.’
2.6 OVERSIZED METAL FRAMES
--- Page 173 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 4
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
2.7 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Post installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (thick, and as
follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
--- Page 174 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 5
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
4) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal-stud partitions.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door
hardware.
--- Page 175 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 6
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with SDI 100, Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
--- Page 176 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 11 13 - 7
City of Moscow 7/31/2026
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
--- Page 177 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 34 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 08 34 00 – METAL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Side-hinged, steel sound control door assemblies.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
B. ASTM A 569 - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Rolled
Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include information indicating compliance with assembly performance requirements,
construction details, material descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Elevations of each type and style of door; details of doors, frames, anchorages, wall -
opening conditions, sound control seals, door bottoms, and thresholds; and locations of
reinforcements and preparations for hardware.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied finishes, manufacturer's standard
finish sheets, showing full range of available finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish not less than 3 by 5 inches.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sound control door assemblies.
--- Page 178 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 34 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating sound control door
assemblies that meet or exceed assembly performance requirements indicated and of
documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency accredited as an acoustical
laboratory in accordance with NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage.
B. Welded Frames: Deliver with two temporary shipping spreader bars each, tack welded across
bottom of frames.
C. Upon delivery, remove cardboard and wrappings from doors and frames to promote air
circulation.
D. Do not use nonvented plastic or canvas to cover doors and frames to prevent entrapping
moisture.
E. Store doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site, spaced with blocking that provides
a minimum 1/4- inch space between each stacked unit to permit air circulation between
components. Stand doors on top end on minimum 4- inch- high wood blocking, to avoid damage
to bottom end, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound control door
assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of product materials and workmanship.
b. Failures of assemblies to have NIC ratings within 5 dB of laboratory STC ratings
specified when tested in accordance with ASTM E336, with results calculated in
accordance with ASTM E413.
c. Faulty operation of sound seals.
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use or
weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
--- Page 179 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 34 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SIDE-HINGED, STEEL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Allmark Door
2. AMBICO Limited
3. Ceco Door; AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY
4. Cogan Wire and Metal Products
5. Curries, AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Group
6. IAC Acoustics
7. Krieger Specialty Products Company
8. Noise Barriers, LLC.
9. Overly Door Company
10. Pioneer Industries; AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel sheet: One of the following:
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 1008, commercial quality.
2. Hot-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 569, pickled and oiled, commercial quality.
3. Conductive stainless required for RF. Do Not paint perimeter contact area. Level, cold
rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 240, commercial quality.
4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, minimum A60 zinc
coating.
5. Primer: Meeting ASTM B 117 salt spray for 150 hours, and ASTM D 1735 water fog test
for organic coatings for 200 hours.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Doors:
1. Door material shall be 14ga stainless steel.
2. Horizontal edges:
a. Close top and bottom edges of doors with continuous steel channels, 16 gage
minimum; spot-weld channels to both door faces.
b. Provide additional flush closing channel at top edge of doors; spot -weld channel to
both door faces.
B. Frames: Fabricate in accordance with Architect-approved shop drawings, and as follows:
1. Frames for interior use: Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, minimum 14- gage thickness
as detailed on architectural drawings.
a. Profiles and anchors shall be custom fabricated to suit wall conditions and to provide
adequate anchoring.
b. Frames to have continuous contact flange to interface with RF Shielding material on
walls and floor (to be provided by others).
2. When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections
designed for assembly in the field; install alignment plates or angles, of same material and
gage as frame, at each joint.
3. Hardware preparation:
--- Page 180 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 34 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
a. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames at factory for fully templated mortised
hardware only, in accordance with Architect -approved shop drawings and supplied
templates.
b. Provide reinforcing plates at surface-mounted or non-templated hardware locations.
4. Floor anchors:
a. Fabricate of same material as frame material; minimum 14 gage.
b. Weld anchors inside each jamb for floor anchorage.
5. Plaster guards: Fabricate from minimum 22 gage steel; weld in place at hardware mortises
on frames to be set in plaster, masonry, or concrete openings.
6. Frames will be shipped knock-down for field assembling by others.
7. Frames will be 4-sided with embedded bottom sill to be attached in the field by others.
C. Hardware and hardware preparation:
1. Factory provided heavy weight hinges.
2. Factory provided 2-point latching devices for each door leaf.
3. Factory provided RF gasketed astragal for the meeting stile.
2.4 FINISH
A. All tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and exposed faces of all welded joints
shall be dressed smooth.
B. Assemblies shall be treated and shall be coated on all accessible surfaces with a rust -inhibitive
primer which meets ASTM B117 salt spray for 150 hours, and ASTM D1735 water fog test for
organic coatings for 200 hours, and which is fully cured prior to shi pment. Prime shall cover all
surfaces, except RF contact points, without runs, smears or bare spots.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions:
1. Prior to installation, check and correct frames for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist
and plumb.
2. Verify openings are in accordance with approved shop drawings.
B. Installer's examination:
1. Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of this
section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are
unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt.
3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been
corrected is prohibited.
4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspect framing before application to ensure the opening to receive the frames are properly
frames, reinforced and that there is a provision for RF Interface.
--- Page 181 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 34 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
B. Inspect all doors and frames for freight or jobsite damage, and review cut outs for conformance
to hardware schedule.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation
instructions; in addition, install steel components in accordance with HMMA 840.
B. Securely attach to wall framing system. Frames to be installed plumb and square.
C. Provide any necessary additional reinforcing to ensure a rigid and permanent installation.
D. Hang doors and install hardware and adjust for smooth operation without binding or sticking.
E. Install gasketing systems, retainers, retainer covers, fixed door bottoms, cam- lift hinges,
thresholds and sills in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. Installation of all other door hardware is specified in Section 08710.
G. Field painting is specified in Section 09900.
1. Remove hardware prior to painting and re-install after painting is complete.
H. Allow proper clearances in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage and pay for the field services of manufacturer's authorized representative to train,
supervise and certify installer ahead of time (preferably before labor begins, at setting of 1st
frame, hanging of 1st door and ahead of handover, field testing or the like -- or at least:
1. Inspect completed installation of door and frame assemblies.
2. Test all components through a minimum of ten complete cycles of operation.
3. Verify each component is correctly installed.
4. Direct installer in adjusting components for correct operation.
5. Issue certified statement of compliance of installed door and frame assemblies to Architect-
approved shop drawings.
6. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in correct operation and maintenance procedures
for components of door and frame assemblies.
B. Notify Architect a minimum of four (4) calendar days prior to scheduled testing dates.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Instruct the Owner's Maintenance Personnel regarding the proper operation and maintenance of
these doors.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 182 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 1
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Hardware for Standard steel and solid core wood doors.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
B. ANSI A 156 - Door Hardware (ANSI/BHMA Standards)
C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
D. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Architectural Wood Work Quality Stan d-
ards.
E. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
F. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
G. UL 10B - Safety Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
H. American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.
I. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association - A156 Series.
J. UL 305 - Safety Panic Hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
B. Verification of Door and Hardware Schedule – submit written confirmation that
supplier has reviewed and verified the function and compatibility of the products
furnished and installed under this section.
C. Keying Information – sample submittal format follows this section
D. Key bitting schedule data – sample format follows this section
E. Submittal Sequence: Submit verified schedule at earliest possible date, partic u-
larly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other
work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction
schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of
other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the co-
ordinated review of hardware schedule.
F. Keying Meeting and Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting with the Architect
and Owner, hardware supplier, and other involved parties prior to return of the re-
viewed finish hardware schedule, to insure all locksets are functionally correct and
keying fulfill the project requirements. Initial keying meeting to occur within 60 days
of Notice to Proceed. As soon as possible after the keying conference, typed cop-
ies of the keying schedule shall be furnished to the Owner and Architect for re-
view.
G. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g.
hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include
with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings or other work affected
by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of
hardware schedule. Allow 30 days minimum for A/E and City of Moscow to re-
view the submittal
H. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of door, frames and
other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Check shop
drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
--- Page 183 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 2
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
proper location and installation of hardware.
I. Contract Close-out Requirements.
1. Project Record Documents.
a. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
b. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master
key code.
2. Operation and Maintenance Data
a. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
b. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrica-
tion requirements, and inspection procedures related to preven-
tative maintenance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements:
1. ANSI A117.1
2. NFPA 101.
3. NFPA 80.
4. NFPA 252.
5. American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.
6. BHMA - A115 Series.
B. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges,
closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be ind i-
cated as offering products complying with requirements.
2. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door
hardware with 5 years documented experience, approved by manufac-
turer, and located within 150 miles of the project
3. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section. AHC should r e-
view construction documents and verify hardware function for given loc a-
tion or requirements for a complete code complying, functioning install a-
tion.
C. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated
doors and frames.
2. Fire Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire- rated openings in com-
pliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requir e-
ments.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 01.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door
opening code to match hardware schedule.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
D. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and har d-
ware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
E. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately
replaceable so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware los s-
es, both before and after installation.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 01.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
--- Page 184 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 3
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
1.7 EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. Under provisions of Division 01. Include coverage for all hardware.
B. Extended Warranty - Manufacturer's standard for individual item.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide under provisions of Division 01.
B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special har d-
ware component.
C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: The numbers shown for the hardware items are taken from the
catalogs of the manufacturers indicated and are for the purpose of establishing
quality, design, and function. Except as listed as approved substitutes by item ba-
sis, no other manufacturer substitutions will be allowed unless approved by the Ar-
chitect ten (10) days prior to bid opening. No substitutions will be allowed after bid
opening.
B. The numbers shown in the hardware groups are taken from the catalogs of the
following manufacturers and are for the purpose of establishing quality, design
and function. Except as listed, no substitution will be allowed unless approved by
the Architect.
ITEM MANUFACTURER APPROVED SUBSTITUTE
Butts Stanley Hager, McKinney
Continuous Hinges Pemko None
Locksets, Latchsets Schlage None
Cylinders Schlage/Primus (Ext.) None
Exit Devices Precision None
Removable Mullions Precision None
Flushbolts Ives DCI
Latch Guards Trimco Ives
Push/Pull Plates Trimco Ives
Closers Norton None
Wall Stops Trimco Ives
Overhead Stops Rixson ABH, Glynn Johnson
Magnetic Holders Rixson Norton, LCN
Protection Plates Trimco Ives
Thresholds Pemko Reese, National Guard
Door Bottoms Pemko Reese, National Guard
Gasketing Pemko Reese, National Guard
Door Drip Cap Pemko
2.2 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each item specified..
B. Finishes: BHMA 1301 Standards.
1. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to
the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce.
differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where
the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of
hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items
to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lockset (or push-
pull units) for color and texture.
--- Page 185 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 4
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any),
composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's
standard, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of
hardware by referenced standards.
3. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware
finishes are those listed in ANSI A156.18 "Materials and Finishes Stand-
ard" and Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA), including
coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufactur-
ers for their products.
4. Hardware in general to be BHMA 626 and /or 652, Satin Chromium Plat-
ed. Applicable Stainless Steel hardware shall be BHMA 630, Satin Stain-
less Steel.
5. Door closers to be in plastic covers finished to match other hardware.
C. Hardware shall meet NFPA-80 requirements for Fire Assembly Rating and be Un-
derwriters Laboratories, Inc. approved for specific application: See Door Schedule.
D. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,
generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which
has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically in-
dicated.
E. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws, except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condi-
tion) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to
match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for
paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish.
F. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is
closed, except when no standard units of type specified are available with con-
cealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut
on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to ade-
quately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each through-bolt or
use hex screw fasteners.
2.3 KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the City of Moscow and provide the type required
(master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster), integrated with the existing system
B. Existing system is: Schlage Primus Level III. (No Substitution). Comply with the
City of Moscow’s instructions for master keying, and, except as otherwise indi-
cated; provide individual change keys for each lock which is not designated to be
keyed alike with a group of related locks. Provide temporary cylinders for use
during the construction period
C. Provide construction cores and keys during the construction period. Permanent
cores and keys prepared according to the accepted keying schedule will be fur-
nished to the owner by the local factory representative prior to occupancy. The
Owner or Owner's agent will install permanent interchangeable cores and return
the construction cores to the factory representative.
D. All cylinders shall be keyed into the existing masterkey system.
E. Furnish keys and related hardware in the following quantities:
1. 20 Each 35-053F Primus key blanks
2. 5 each 35-053J Primus key blanks
3. 1 each 35-052F Control key blanks
4. 10 each Great Grand Master Key Blanks
5. 20 each 35-101F key blanks
6. 4 each Master Padlocks 6621 WB
7. 3 each Master Drivers 298-0628
8. 3 each Cylinders 21-002F 626
F. Key all doors.
--- Page 186 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 5
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.4 HINGES
A. General
1. ANSI A 156J
2. Quantity per door leaf height (minimum):
1 pair to 5'-0" high
1-1/2 pair 5'-l" to 7'-7"
2 pair 7'-7" to 10'-0"
3. Hinge height (minimum):
4 1/2" to 3'-O" door width
5" 3'-1" to 4'-0"
4. Hinge width (minimum): twice the door thickness, plus the jamb trim pro-
ject at 180 degree swing.
5. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both
leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template produced
units.
6. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head machine and/or wood screws for in-
stallation of units. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or piv-
ots. Provide stainless steel fasteners on exterior doors.
7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
a. Steel Hinges - Steel pins.
b. Non-Ferrous Hinges - Stainless steel pins.
c. Out-Swinging Doors - Non-removable Pins(NRP). Use set screw
in barrel type.
d. Tips - Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves,
except where hospital tip (HT) indicated.
B. Mortise Hinges
1. Full Mortise Hinges, 5-knuckle, flat button tip, anti-friction bearing type.
Use Brass/Bronze type hinges on all exterior exposed doors.
2. Hinge A: High frequency use , heavy weight (entry, class, restroom)
Stanley: FBB 168 Steel (652) ANSI A 8111
FBB 199 Brass/Bronze (626) ANSI A 2111
McKinney: T4B3786 Steel (652)
T4B3386 Brass/Bronze (626)
3. Hinge B: Average frequency used, standard weight (office, storage
mechanical)
Stanley: FBB 179 Steel (652) ANSI A 8112
FBB 191 Brass/Bronze (626) ANSI A 2112
McKinney: TB3713 Steel (652)
TB3313 Brass/Bronze (626)
2.5 LOCKSETS AND LATCHES
A. General
1. ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 ANSI A117.1, Accessibility Code
2. Features:
a. Lockset and Trim: BHMA 626 Finished.
1) Trim: 06L (mortise) & RHO (cylindrical)
b. Backset: 2-3/4 inch.
c. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for
each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame,
finished to match hardware.
d. Latchbolt: 9/16" minimum throw, 3/4" on Fire Door pairs, and
Auxiliary Deadlocking Latchbolt feature.
B. Mortise & Cylindrical
1. Lockset x ANSI No. __
2. ANSI No.
--- Page 187 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 6
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
F75 Passage
F76 Privacy
F81 Entry/Office
F84 Classroom
F86 Storage/Mechanical
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Schlage
b. No other approved manufacturers
2.7 CLOSERS
A. General
1. ANSI A156.4, Grade 7 ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Code
2. Provide closer on active leaf of non-rated paired doors.
3. Install closer on interior (push) side of door.
4. Size closer as per Manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Install thru-bolts with backer plates on all wood doors.
6. Provide parallel arm mounting ANSI/BHMA CO2021. Use regular arm
mounting only where parallel mounting is not appropriate or recom-
mended.
7. Provide heavy duty type arms.
8. Provide hold-open type arms except where fire rated assemblies occur:
see Hardware Schedule in Section 08 71 00.
9. Covers: 7500 P Norton (molded plastic); Color: Aluminum, BHMA 689.
B. Schedule:
Item Location Norton No.
1. Closer B Door Stop, Hold Open, Handicap UN17500 H,
Rated, Exterior Doors
C. Other approved Manufacturer's: None
2.8 PUSH-PULLS
A. General
1. ANSI/BHMA 626 finished.
2. Plates: 1/8" extruded, beveled top and bottom, 4" x 16".
3. Pulls: Bolt Through Door, 3/4" diameter x 8".
4. Push Plates: Countersink pull through bolts and cover with push plates.
B. Schedule:
1. Push/Pull — 1001-3/1017-3 - Trimco.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General
1. ANSI A156.16
ANSI A117.1 Accessibility code.
2. ANSI/BHMA 626 finished.
3. Fasteners
a. Machine screws and threaded anchors at concrete or masonry.
b. Self tapping screws at wood or metal framing.
4. Metal risers at carpet floors.
5. Electromagnetic Holder
a. ANSI A156.15.
b. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (U.L.)
c. Fail Safe Operation
d. Power Source: 24 V. AC/DC from Fire Alarm System. Coordi-
nate with Division 26.
e. Provide extension arms and special mounting plates as required
for complete installation of each electromagnetic holder. Con-
tractor shall provide any special mounting hardware as a part of
--- Page 188 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 7
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
the base bid.
B. Schedule
1. Wall Stop 1270CV Trimco
2. Floor Stop 1209, 1211 Trimco
3. Door Holder 1220 Trimco
2.10 BOLTS
A. General
1. ANSI A156.16
2. ANSI/BHMA 626 finished.
3. Automatic top and bottom bolts on inactive leaf of a pair of fire assembly
rated doors, complete with dust-proof strike.
B. Schedule:
1. Flush Bolt FB458 Ives
a. Approved Substitute: Glynn Johnson
2. Floor Strike DP2 Ives
a. Approved Substitute: Glynn Johnson
3. Automatic Flush Bolts 842/942 Ives
a. Approved Substitute: Glynn Johnson
2.11 DOOR PLATES
A. General
1. ANSI A156.6
2. Stainless Steel ANSIBHMA 630 finished
3. Width of door leaf less 1 1/2" at single doors and less 1" at pairs
4. Solid Metal (0.050 inch), all edges beveled
5. Install on push side of door
B. Schedule:
1. Kickplate: width specified above x 10" high Trimco
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. General
1. ANSI A117.1, Accessibility Code
2. Aluminum, ANSIBBHMA 719 finished
3. Thermal Break
4. Stainless Steel Anchors
B. Schedule:
1. Threshold 253 x 3AFG PEMKO
2. Threshold, Special - Division 5 Fabrication
2.13 WEATHERSTRIP AND SEALS
A. General
1. NFPA 80, 2-5.4 at fire rated and smoke assembly doors
2. Aluminum, ANSI/BHMA 719 finished
3. Seals, vinyl and silicone
B. Schedule:
1. Door Seal S88D PEMKO (Fire/Smoke/weather)
2. Meeting Stile Seal 18061 PEMKO
3. Door Sweep 18062 PEMKO (Exterior Door)
2.15 DOOR COORDINATOR
A. General
1. ANSI A156.3
2. Steel, Primed, ANSIBHMA 600 finished.
3. Provide filler tube-infill, strike and brackets.
--- Page 189 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 8
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
2.16 DOOR DRIP CAP
A. General
1. Clear Anodized Aluminum, 343
2. Install full width of door opening with 2” extension of coverage on both
sides of operable door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Division 01.
B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as i n-
structed by the Manufacturer.
C. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the cor-
rect characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and
Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Conform to ANSI 117.1 and American Disabilities Act Guidelines for positioning
requirements for the handicapped.
D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware
onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, c o-
ordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection
with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
E. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the a t-
tachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
F. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage faste n-
ers. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
G. Set supporting elements of thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of Type E
sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect finished installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to
punch list, acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustments of all har d-
ware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper
function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for
final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hard-
ware in each area and before substantial completes the installer, accompanied by repr e-
sentatives of the latch and lock, exit device, and closer manufacturers, shall return to the
project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and
hardware, and to consult with and instruct the City of Moscow’s personnel in recom-
mended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have
--- Page 190 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage 08 71 00 - 9
Moscow, Idaho 7/31/2026
deteriorated of failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units.
Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the
performance of the hardware.
3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE - HARDWARE GROUPS
HW1 (#103A, #103B – Exterior Door)
3 ea Hinges T4A3786 26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
1 ea Lockset Schlage ALX53P
1 ea Closer/Stop UNI7500 689 x 6191 x 6891
2 ea Kickplate K1050 24 x 2 LTDW 630 B4E
1 ea Wall Stop 1270CV 626
1 set Gasket S88D
1 ea Door Drip Cap 343
HW2 (#101, #102 Utility Room, Interior Door)
3 ea Hinges T4A3786 26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2
1 ea Lockset Schlage ALX53P
1 ea Cylinder 30-001 626
1 ea Closer/Stop UNI7500 689 x 6191 x 6891
2 ea Kickplate K1050 24 x 2 LTDW 630 B4E
1 ea Wall Stop 1270CV 626
1 ea Threshold 271AK x LAR
2 ea Door Sweep 18062CNB x TEK x LAR
1 set Gasket S88D
1 ea Door Drip Cap 343
HW3 (#100A / #100B Mens / Stage Door)
3 ea Hinges by Mnfr
1 ea Deadbolt L464L 626
1 ea Cylinder 30-001 626
1 set Push/Pull — 1001-3/1017-3 626
2 ea Kickplate K1050 24 x 2 LTDW 630 B4E
1 ea Wall Stop 1270CV 626
1 ea Threshold 271AK x LAR
2 ea Door Sweep 18062CNB x TEK x LAR
1 set Gasket S88D
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
--- Page 191 ---
City of Moscow - East City Park Restroom Replacement
Moscow, Idaho
SECTION 09 00 00
Finish Schedule
ROOM ROOM FLOOR BASE N. WALL E. WALL S. WALL W. WALL CEILING REMARKS
No. Name Finish Matl Matl Finish Matl Finish Matl Finish Matl Finish Matl Finish
First Floor
100 Stage SC CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU PT-2 NC CF Ref 09 91 00
101 Storage SC CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU PT-2 NC CF Ref 09 91 00
102 Electrical SC CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU PT-2 NC CF Ref 09 91 00
103 Hallway SC CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU CMS CMU PT-2 NC CF Ref 09 91 00
ABBREVIATIONS KEY
CMS Clear Masonry Sealer COVE Cove Base GB Gypsum Board RB Rubber Base
CPT Carpet NC Open to structure PLAM Plastic Laminate SC Sealed Concrete
CONC Concrete Exist Existing to Remain PT Paint STN Stair tread and Nosing
CMU Concrete Masonry Unit FF Factory Finish E-PT Epoxy Paint FC Fiber Cement Siding
FRP Fiber Reinforced Panel PFS Paint on Floor Sealer CF Clear Finish
ABB. ITEM MANUFACTURER STYLE: COLOR/FINISH:
General Finish Notes:
1 All interior CMU walls and ceilings shall receive epoxy paint (Interior metal panels shall not be painted).
1
--- Page 192 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. All surface preparation throughout the project
2. All site-applied painting and clear finish application on the project.
3. Surface finish schedule.
B. Related Sections
2. Mechanical items: Painting of anchors/hangers, piping, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, insulation, etc. shall be performed by this section except where specifi-
cally stated otherwise in Division 22, or 23. All paint materials and methods, re-
gardless of installer, shall meet the requirements set forth in Section 09 91 00 for
Products and Execution. Upon completion of the project, all materials exposed
to view shall be painted.
3. Electrical items: Painting of anchors/hangers, piping, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, insulation, etc. shall be performed by this section except where specifi-
cally stated otherwise in Division 26, 27, or 28. All paint materials and methods,
regardless of installer, shall meet the requirements set forth in Section 09 91 00
for Products and Execution. Upon completion of the project, all materials ex-
posed to view shall be painted.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 16 - Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
C. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 01.
B. Provide product data on all finishing products.
C. Submit three (3) 8”x 10” paint draw downs of each specified paint material in each speci-
fied color and sheen
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and
finish products with three years experience.
2. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing approved
by product manufacturer.
B. Field Samples
1. Provide samples under provisions of Division 01.
2. Before proceeding with paint application, finish one complete typical wall with
trim, door frames, doors, etc. of each paint type and color scheme required,
clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and workmanship
2. Provide field sample panel, on at least 100-sq. ft. of surface until required sheen,
color and texture are achieved.
3. Locate where directed.
4. Once each scheme has written approval of the Architect and the Owner, sample
may remain as part of the Work.
5. If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard for workmanship
throughout work
C. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to ASTM E 84 for flame/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
--- Page 193 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 2
7/31/2026
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 01.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 01.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instruc-
tions for mixing and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum
of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's i n-
structions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 50 degrees for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after applic a-
tion of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 85
percent unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F; unless required ot h-
erwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80-ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.7 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Under provisions of Division 01.
B. Provide Manufacturer's Standard Material Warranty.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Stock: provide 10 gallons of each type and color of paint or coating used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. PAINT, STAIN, AND URETHANE
1. Sherwin-Williams Company
2. Columbia Paint Corporation
3. Pittsburgh Paints
4. Benjamin Moore
5. Parker Paints
6. Dupont
B. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING – EXPOSED EXTERIOR STEEL
1. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams
a. By substitution request: Carboline products equivalent to basis of design
b. By substitution request: Tnemec products equivalent to basis of design
C. HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING – Elastomeric Paint
1. Sherwin Williams
D. PAINTED/SEALED CONCRETE FLOORS
1. Sherwin Williams Armorseal seal finish system
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks
or sags.
C. Provide a tint variation between all under coats and the final coat.
--- Page 194 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 3
7/31/2026
D. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials
not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial
quality.
E. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finishes.
F. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Primers, Paints, Coatings, Stains, and Transparent
Finishes: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, excl u-
sive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Sub-
part D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are
applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC content not
more than 250 g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC content not more than 100 g/L.
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC content not more than 730 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC content not more than 550 g/L.
7. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC content not more than 350 g/L.
8. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC content not more than 550 g/L.
9. Stains: VOC content not more than 250 g/L.
G. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat
paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with
the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coat-
ings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop.
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
--- Page 195 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 4
7/31/2026
A. Verify that substrate is ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufac turer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. R eport any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016.
4. Concrete Floors: 12 percent.
5. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate.
D. Ensure surface temperatures or the surrounding air temperature is above 45 deg F be-
fore applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work
is 45 degrees F and 50 degrees F for exterior work. Minimum application temperature for
varnish and stain finishes is 65 degrees F.
E. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain tem-
peratures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application
of finishes.
F. Provide minimum 80 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. No exceptions
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing for fi n-
ishing.
B. Correct defects, patch and fill substrate cracks, dents, holes, and other surface inconsis t-
encies to match adjacent surfaces. Clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Concrete Floors: Schedule to receive clear wear surface, remove contamination, shot
blast and prepare according to wear surface manufacturers instructions. Verify required
acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
F. Concrete floors scheduled to receive sealer: Prepare floor according to sealer manufac-
turer’s instructions.
G. Siding Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
Apply coat of etching primer.
I. Concrete and CMU Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose
paint, mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and
grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove
stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate
after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. Confirm all surfaces are smooth and
structurally sound. All loosely adhering paint, coatings and concrete shall be completely
removed by scraping, pressure washing, blasting or other mechanical means. Chalky,
oxidized or contaminated surfaces must be washed with Marathon Cleaning Concentrate
(MCC) or equal biodegradable cleaner.
1. All cracks greater than hairline shall be routed to 1/16" and caulked with NP-1
urethane sealant.
J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.
K. Steel Doors: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Seal top and
bottom edges with primer.
L. At dissimilar materials all joints are to be caulked interior or exterior. All joints larger than
1/16” is to be caulked or filled.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
--- Page 196 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 5
7/31/2026
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish, without streaking, telegraphing of drywall joints or
brush marks.
D. Apply finish coats of paint slightly darker than preceding prime coat unless otherwise ap-
proved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G. Back-roll all spray applied primer and finish coats on gypsum board, plaster finishes,
CMU, dimensional lumber, sheathing and fiber cement siding.
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
I. Seal concrete floors with polyurethane sealer.
J. Elastomeric Paint:
a. Application – Primer, apply per manufacturer’s full recommendations.
b. Application – Topcoat, apply per manufacturer’s full recommendations.
K. Paint all roof top items, including but not limited to, ducts, pipe vents, roof hatches smoke
vents, and ladders.
L. Paint all Mechanical and Electrical Equipment exposed to public view, this shall include
but not be limited to, ducts, conduits, fitting, suspension/anchors and boxes. Protect int e-
rior reflector surfaces of light fixtures from any paint application or overspray.
M. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finis h-
ing.
N. Field finish surfaces not factory pre-finished. Extend finish all the way behind all case-
work and floor and wall mounted equipment.
O. Protection
1. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a
result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.
2. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray
or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces
within storage and preparation area.
3. Place cotton waste, cloths and materials which may constitute a fire hazard in
closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
4. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, mechanical equipment, fittings and
fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored,
cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to
clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.
P. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
1. Refer to mechanical and electrical sections with respect to painting and finishing
requirements, color coding, identification banding of equipment, ducting, piping
and conduit.
2. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems
from location, sand and paint separately.
3. Finish paint primed and existing field painted equipment to color selected.
4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are plated or
covered with a pre-finished coating.
Q. Site items
1. Site CMU reference plans and/or coordinate with Architect prior to painting.
2. All exposed steel, CMU and piping is to be painted, coordinate color with Architect
prior to painting.
3.4 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in
closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
--- Page 197 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
09 91 00 - 6
7/31/2026
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.9 SCHEDULES
A. Shop-Primed Items for Site Finishing.
1. Standard steel doors and frames (Division 08): All exposed surfaces , tops and
bottoms of doors.
B. Exterior Surfaces
1. 1. Exposed Exterior Steel and field painted metals.
a. Primer: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Primer, applied at 3.0 mil dry film
thickness
b. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Sher-Cryl HPA, applied at 3.0 -4.0
mil thickness
c. Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Sher-Cryl HPA, applied at 3.0 -4.0 mil
thickness
d. Approved substitution: Carboline or Tnemec system by approved substi-
tution in accordance with Division 01 procedures.
2. Steel Shop Primed (exterior hollow metal doors and frames only):
a. Touch up with zinc chromate primer per TTP-645A specifications.
b. Two Coats alkyd enamel, gloss, 3.0 mil gloss per TTP-37D specifica-
tions.
3. Exposed Concrete Masonry Units Surfaces (Clear Masonry Sealer and Graffiti
Protection). Integrally colored masonry units as indicated in the drawings and
specifications.
a. Specified in Division 3.
4. Clear Finished Exterior Exposed Wood Members (Glued-lam & CLT):
a. One coat stain. Penetrating alkyd oil, wiping type, color selected by Ar-
chitect.
b. One coat: Sikkens – Cetol 1 base coat, applied according to manufactur-
er’s requirements.
c. Two coats Sikkens – Cetol 23 top coats, applied according to manufac-
turer’s requirements.
C. Interior Surfaces
1. Steel - Primed:
a. Touch-up with original primer.
b. Paint Finish - One coat acrylic primer. 1.5 mil min.
c. Paint Finish - Two coats Alkyd (Pro Mar 200) semi-gloss finish. 3 mil min
2. Concrete Block:
a. Paint Finish-one coat alkali resistant acrylic primer. 2.5 mil min
b Paint Finish-one coat (“Polymide”) acrylic-epoxy block filler. 1.5 mil min
c. Paint Finish- two coats semi-gloss (high solids) “Aquapon” Polymide-
epoxy coating. 3 mil min
3. Concrete Floors (PFS – Paint on Floor Sealer):
a. Paint Finish-one coat Sherwin Williams Armorseal 33 Primer. 1 mil min
b Paint Finish-two coats Sherwin Williams Armorseal 1000 HS Epoxy color
coat; 1.5 mil min. each coat
c. Clear Floor Finish- Sherwin Williams Armorseal 1000 HS Epoxy clear
coat. 3 mil min.
D. Colors – Reference Finish Schedule and Finish Materials Designations and as selected
by Architect.
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
--- Page 198 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 19 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors
and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and
available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D. Service entrance cable is not permitted.
E. Armored cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction
boxes to luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m).
b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raised
floors for branch circuits up to 20 A.
1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit
homerun from first outlet to panelboard.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to damage.
c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
F. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction
boxes to luminaires.
1) Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m).
b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raised
floors for branch circuits up to 20 A.
1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit
homerun from first outlet to panelboard.
2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Where exposed to damage.
c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as
suitable for those locations.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
--- Page 199 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 19 - 2
7/31/2026
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26.
H. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where
specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air
plenums.
I. Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated.
Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is not permitted. Conductor sizes
indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors
designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
4. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for
substitution): AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and
compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated.
J. Minimum Conductor Size: 12 AWG.
1. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.
K. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
L. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using
vinyl color coding electrical tape.
3. Color Code:
a. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Neutral/Grounded: White.
b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
c. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink.
d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color
code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority
having jurisdiction.
e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.
2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.
a. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.
--- Page 200 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 19 - 3
7/31/2026
2.4 ARMORED CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for
use in classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation: Type THHN.
E. Grounding: Combination of interlocking armor and integral bonding wire.
F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
2.5 METAL-CLAD CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed
for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.
E. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
G. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of
installed location.
2.6 POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type TC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1277.
B. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation: Type XHHW or XHHW-2.
E. Jacket: PVC or Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE).
2.7 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26.
C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors.
D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations
designed for terminal lugs.
2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less
than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors where connectors are required.
E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
--- Page 201 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 19 - 4
7/31/2026
G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F (105 degrees C) for
standard applications and 302 degrees F (150 degrees C) for high temperature applications;
pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
I. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated;
listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to
abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to
221 degrees F (105 degrees C).
2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying
with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and
sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) and suitable
for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C).
B. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be
installed.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant:
1. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 267.
2. Suitable for use with conductors/cables and associated insulation/jackets to be installed.
3. Suitable for use at installation temperature.
D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
E. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building
elements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:
1. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
3. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors
among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same
raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each
individual branch circuit.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104.
E. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120.
F. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports
and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from
building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.
1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on
ceiling tiles.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each outlet.
J. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound
where not pre-filled by manufacturer.
--- Page 202 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 19 - 5
7/31/2026
K. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for
the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
L. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
M. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
--- Page 203 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 26 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding
and bonding system components.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system.
C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
D. Grounding System Resistance:
1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless
otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not
constitute normally dry conditions.
2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according
to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.
E. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form
grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical
damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end
with bonding jumper.
2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where
present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10
feet (3.0 m) at an accessible location not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the point of
entrance to the building.
b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe
electrically continuous.
c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal
of meter without disconnecting jumper.
3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:
a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact
with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20
feet (6.0 m) of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller
than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct
contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide two electrodes unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet (3.0 m) from each other and any other
ground electrode.
--- Page 204 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 26 - 2
7/31/2026
6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding
electrode system resistance.
7. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for
common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in
NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system
grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches (6 by 50 by 300 mm) unless otherwise
indicated or required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as
possible to service disconnect enclosure.
c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor unless
otherwise indicated.
8. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG
for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70.
F. Service-Supplied System Grounding:
1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral
(grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated,
make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.
2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded)
bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other
connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service
disconnect.
G. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:
1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.
2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.
3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect
equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.
4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral
(grounded) conductors and ground.
H. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic
equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and
other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical
conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with
NFPA 70.
2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit
raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.
3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment
grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment
ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground
bus.
6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to
accommodate conduit movement.
7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This
includes, but is not limited to:
a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground
water pipe used as grounding electrode.
b. Metal gas piping.
c. Metal process piping.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
--- Page 205 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 26 - 3
7/31/2026
1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact
with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in
raceway).
C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors
and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,
concealed and other inaccessible connections.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or
exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.
D. Ground Bars:
1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.
2. Size: As indicated.
3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.
E. Ground Rod Electrodes:
1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.
2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.
3. Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter by 10 feet (3.0 m) length, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.
Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury
horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide
ground plates.
1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches (150
mm) below finished grade.
2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches (100 mm) of top of
rod exposed.
D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and
contact surfaces.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
--- Page 206 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 29 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel/strut
framing systems, nonpenetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete/masonry
anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Comply with the following. Where requirements differ, comply with most stringent.
a. NFPA 70.
b. Applicable building code.
c. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for complete installation of electrical work.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended, where
applicable.
4. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for load to be supported
with minimum safety factor of 1.5. Include consideration for vibration, equipment
operation, and shock loads where applicable.
5. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
6. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless
specifically indicated or permitted.
7. Steel Components: Use corrosion-resistant materials suitable for environment where
installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel,
or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps and clamps suitable for conduit or cable to be supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers and brackets suitable for boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel/Strut Framing Systems:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated, continuous-slot, metal channel/strut and associated
fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field assembly of supports.
2. Comply with MFMA-4.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded, zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use anchor and fastener
types indicated for specified applications.
2. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC
Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.
--- Page 207 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 29 - 2
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install hangers and supports in accordance with NECA 1.
C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC -ES)
evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.
D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Owner/Architect, do not provide support from
suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Owner/Architect, do not provide support from roof
deck.
G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural
Engineer.
H. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal, fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel/strut to
support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel/strut secured to studs to support equipment surface mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel/strut to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations
to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized concrete
pad 4 inches (100 mm) in height.
5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on
its own weight for support.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
--- Page 208 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 33.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and
fittings.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits
embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2-inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70,
manufacturer's instructions, and product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use conduit types indicated for
specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with most
restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for particular application is not specified, use
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
C. Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.
3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use rigid PVC conduit.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel
rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or schedule
80 rigid PVC conduit where emerging from underground.
5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2-inch (53 mm) trade size is provided,
use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) elbows or PVC-coated galvanized steel
rigid metal conduit (RMC) elbows for bends.
6. Where galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) or galvanized steel intermediate metal
conduit (IMC) is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has resistivity of less than
2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or
local experience, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection
coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection.
7. Where galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is installed in direct contact with
earth, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-
applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
provide supplementary corrosion protection.
8. Where aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) or aluminum electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
is installed in direct contact with earth, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied
corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection.
9. Where galvanized rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit
(IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) emerges from concrete into
soil, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-
applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
provide supplementary corrosion protection for minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) on either
side of where conduit emerges.
D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized
steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) .
E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC),
galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing
(EMT), or aluminum electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
--- Page 209 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 2
7/31/2026
F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC),
galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing
(EMT), or aluminum electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized
steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) .
H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC),
galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing
(EMT), or aluminum electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit
(RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic
tubing (EMT).
J. Exposed, Exterior, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical
metallic tubing (EMT).
K. Exposed, Exterior, Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit (RMC) or galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
L. Flexible Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit
(FMC).
M. Flexible Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC).
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated.
N. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC), galvanized steel
electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or aluminum electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
2.2 CONDUIT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Electrical Service Conduits: See Section 26 21 00 for additional requirements.
C. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: See Section 26 05 26 for additional requirements.
D. Provide conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for complete raceway system.
E. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended.
F. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. Branch Circuits: 3/4-inch (21 mm) trade size.
2. Underground, Interior: 1-inch (27 mm) trade size.
3. Underground, Exterior: 1-inch (27 mm) trade size.
G. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
B. Fittings:
1. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B or UL 6.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including
set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted.
2.4 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.
B. Fittings:
1. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B or UL 6A.
2. Material: Use aluminum.
--- Page 210 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 3
7/31/2026
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including
set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted.
2.5 GALVANIZED STEEL INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with
ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.
B. Fittings:
1. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B or UL 1242.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including
set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted.
2.6 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
6.
B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
C. PVC-Coated Boxes and Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.
2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use boxes and fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL
514A, UL 514B, or UL 6.
3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch (1.02
mm).
D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum
thickness of 15 mil, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm).
2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard-wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled
as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
2.8 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal
conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
2.9 GALVANIZED STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing complying with
ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
--- Page 211 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 4
7/31/2026
2.10 ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT aluminum electrical metallic tubing listed and labeled as
complying with UL 797A.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B; listed for use with aluminum EMT.
2. Material: Use aluminum.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
2.11 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,
Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors r ated 90 degrees
C.
B. Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 651; material to match conduit.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive compound listed as
complying with UL 2419; suitable for use with conduit to be installed.
C. Pull Strings: Use nylon or polyester tape with average breaking strength of not less than 1,250
lbf (5.6 kN).
D. Sealing Systems for Concrete Penetrations:
1. Sleeves: Provide water stop ring or cement coating that bonds to concrete to prevent
water infiltration.
2. Rate for minimum of 40 psig; suitable for sealing around conduits to be installed.
E. Sealing Systems for Roof Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as
required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty; suitable for conduits
and roofing system to be installed; designed to accommodate existing penetrations where
applicable.
F. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories
as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for conduits and facade materials
to be installed.
G. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building
elements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install conduit in accordance with NECA 1.
C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.
E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
F. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by
manufacturer.
G. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
H. Conduit Routing:
1. Conceal conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
2. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
--- Page 212 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 5
7/31/2026
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
3. Unless otherwise approved, do not route exposed conduits:
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
d. Across building exterior surfaces.
4. Arrange conduit to provide no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between pull
points.
5. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet (46 m) between pull points.
6. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at
sealing fittings where moisture may collect.
7. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) between conduits and piping for other
systems.
I. Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
methods approved by authorities having jurisdiction; see Section 26 05 29.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
J. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized
steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three- piece
couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid
into connectors.
4. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double
lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
5. Provide insulating bushings, insulated throats, or listed metal fittings with smooth,
rounded edges at conduit terminations to protect conductors.
K. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set
sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
3. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
4. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings
and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations
are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system
and maintain roof warranty.
5. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements; see
Section 07 84 00.
L. Underground Installation:
1. Provide trenching and backfilling.
2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 18 inches (460 mm).
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches (300 mm) to bottom of slab.
3. Provide underground warning tape along entire conduit length for service entrance where
not concrete-encased; see Section 26 05 53.
--- Page 213 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.13 - 6
7/31/2026
M. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated
to be concrete-encased, provide minimum concrete cover of 3 inches (76 mm) on all sides
unless otherwise indicated.
N. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion
and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected
equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit
installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
O. Conduit Sealing:
1. Use foam conduit sealant to prevent entry of moisture and gases. This includes, but is
not limited to:
a. Where conduits enter building from outside.
b. Where service conduits enter building from underground distribution system.
c. Where conduits enter building from underground.
d. Where conduits may transport moisture to contact live parts.
2. Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature
differential, use foam conduit sealant at accessible point near penetration to prevent
condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
b. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior
spaces.
c. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers.
3. Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous/classified locations, provide
identified/listed sealing fittings or conduit mechanical seals as approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; locate as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70.
P. Provide pull string in each empty conduit and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be
installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches (300 mm) at each end.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13
--- Page 214 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.16 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 33.16 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and
enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground
boxes/enclosures.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOXES
A. General Requirements:
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by
NFPA 70 and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors
terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), Including Those Used as
Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise
indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.
4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used.
5. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.
6. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
7. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
8. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration
where required.
9. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
10. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
11. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A.
12. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A; furnish with threaded hubs.
13. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL
514C.
14. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and
weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of
luminaire where required.
15. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not
use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches
(1,650 cu cm):
--- Page 215 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.16 - 2
7/31/2026
1. Comply with NEMA EN 10250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or
UL 508A.
2. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm):
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with
legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.
2. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than
12 inches (300 mm).
3. Applications:
a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate
Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier
8 load rating.
b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular
Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 15 load
rating.
c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular
traffic.
4. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA
130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
indicated.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are
indicated or permitted.
H. Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31
00 as required where approved by the Architect.
2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location
at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide
minimum 6 inches (150 mm) horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
6. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire
resistance will not be reduced.
I. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.
3. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other
than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in
accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other
systems.
--- Page 216 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.16 - 3
7/31/2026
4. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or
ceiling support system.
J. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 4 inch (100 mm) high concrete pad.
K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
L. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.
3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch (25 mm) above finished
grade.
4. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.
M. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16
--- Page 217 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 33.23 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 33.23 - SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, service
condition requirements, and accessories.
1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and
cables.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
2.2 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.
2.3 WIREWAYS
A. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as
complying with UL 870.
B. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA EN 10250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA EN 10250, Type 3R, painted steel with screw-cover; include
provision for padlocking.
C. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.
D. Minimum Wireway Size: 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install raceways plumb and level.
D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but
not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase
size of wireway where necessary.
E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 05 29 at intervals complying with
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.
F. Close unused raceway openings.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.23
--- Page 218 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 36 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 36 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cable tray
system components and accessories. Include dimensions, materials, fabrication details,
finishes, and span/load ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRAY SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new cable tray system consisting of all required components, fittings, supports,
accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Do not use cable tray for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing/classification.
D. Provide cable tray system and associated components suitable for use at indicated span/load
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, specified span/load ratings are based on safety factor of 1.5 and
working load only (no additional concentrated static load), with ratings for metal cable tray
systems in accordance with NEMA BI 50015.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, specified load/fill depths and inside widths are nominal values, with
values for metal cable tray systems in accordance with NEMA BI 50015 including applicable
allowable tolerances.
2.2 METAL CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
A. Comply with NEMA BI 50015.
B. Finishes:
1. Zinc Electroplated Steel: Comply with ASTM B633.
2. Mill-Galvanized Before Fabrication (Pre-Galvanized) Steel: Comply with ASTM
A653/A653M, G90 coating.
C. Metal Ladder Cable Tray:
1. Material: Mill-galvanized before fabrication (pre-galvanized) steel.
2. Load/Fill Depth: As indicated on drawings.
3. Span/Load Rating: As indicated on drawings.
4. Rung Spacing: 9 inches (229 mm) on center for straight lengths.
5. Inside Width: As indicated on drawings.
6. Inside Radius of Fittings: 12 inches (305 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cable tray in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), and NEMA VE 2.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange cable tray to be parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
D. Arrange cable tray to provide required clearances and maintain cable access.
E. Install cable tray plumb and level, with sections aligned and with horizontal runs at the proper
elevation.
F. Cable Tray Movement Provisions:
1. Provide suitable expansion fittings where cable tray is subject to movement, including but
not limited to:
a. Where cable tray crosses structural joints intended for expansion.
b. Long straight cable tray runs in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
--- Page 219 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 36 - 2
7/31/2026
2. Use expansion guides in lieu of hold-down clamps where prescribed in NEMA VE 2.
3. Set gaps for expansion fittings in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
G. Cable Provisions:
1. Use suitable fixed barrier strips to maintain separation of cables as indicated and as
required by NFPA 70.
2. Use suitable drop-out fittings or bushings where cables exit cable tray as required to
maintain minimum cable bending radius.
3. Use suitable cable support fittings for long vertical cable tray runs with heavy cables.
H. Provide end closures at unconnected ends of cable tray runs.
I. Cable Tray Support:
1. Use manufacturer's recommended hangers and supports, located in accordance with
NEMA VE 2 and manufacturer's requirements, but not exceeding specified span unless
otherwise approved by Engineer. Provide required support and attachment in accordance
with Section 26 05 29, where not furnished by cable tray manufacturer.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
J. Grounding and Bonding Requirements, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:
1. Comply with grounding and bonding requirements of NEMA VE 2.
K. Cable Installation:
1. Comply with cable installation requirements of NEMA VE 2.
2. Use cable clamps or cable ties to fasten conductors/cables to vertical and horizontal runs
of cable tray.
a. Distance Between Fastening Points for Vertical Runs: 18 inches (450 mm).
b. Distance Between Fastening Points for Horizontal Runs: As required to maintain
spacing and confine conductor/cable within the cable fill area.
L. Penetrations: Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
M. Identification Requirements, in Addition to Those Specified in Section 26 05 53.
N. Install cable tray covers where indicated and as follows:
END OF SECTION 26 05 36
--- Page 220 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 53 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within
sight of equipment.
4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards
with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to
identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and
spaces.
b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within
sight of equipment.
3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination
of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of
identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service
disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits
supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority
having jurisdiction.
3. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available
fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation
by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.
b. Industrial machinery.
c. Panelboards.
d. Switchboards.
4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for
electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter
socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
--- Page 221 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 53 - 2
7/31/2026
5. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other
guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with
the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved
equivalent.
6. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults,
rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at
over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".
7. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and
enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V
nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".
8. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical
hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message
"DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnec t all
electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.
B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.
2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded
and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or
branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits
served by more than one nominal voltage system.
C. Identification for Devices:
1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26.
2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all
receptacles.
a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide
identification on inside surface of wallplate.
3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall -mounted
control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for
multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.
4. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection,
where permitted.
D. Identification for Luminaires:
1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency
power system.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification Nameplates:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable
for exterior use.
2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-
conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm);
engraved text.
3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); engraved or
laser-etched text.
4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); engraved
or laser-etched text.
B. Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and
abrasion resistant.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Format for Equipment Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm) by 2.5 inches (64 mm).
--- Page 222 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 53 - 3
7/31/2026
2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height:
a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.
D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm) by 2.5 inches (64 mm).
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe
operation and maintenance.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:
1. Minimum Size: 2 inches (51 mm) by 4 inches (100 mm).
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe
operation and maintenance.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.
F. Format for Receptacle Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).
2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
5. Color: Black text on clear background.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches (76 mm) wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil
(0.1 mm), unless otherwise required for proper detection.
C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D. Color:
1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.
2.4 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
B. Warning Signs:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive
vinyl signs.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.
2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-
adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using
materials recognized to UL 969.
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and
accessories recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches (51 mm by 102 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
--- Page 223 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 05 53 - 4
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to
interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
C. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches (75
mm) below finished grade.
D. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
--- Page 224 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 09 23 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,
service condition requirements, and installed features.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors.
B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,
hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
2.2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. All Occupancy Sensors:
1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use
capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small
desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic contr ol
of load indicated.
2. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.
3. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low-
voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with
electronic and magnetic ballasts, LED lighting, and fractional motor loads, with no
minimum load requirements.
4. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load
indicated on drawings.
5. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are acceptable provided that all
components and wiring modifications necessary for proper operation are included.
6. Wireless Sensors:
a. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) through typical construction materials.
b. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)
Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for Class B application.
c. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life.
B. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at
standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated
manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.
b. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 27 26, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion
within an area of 900 square feet (83.6 sq m).
3. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area
of 400 square feet (37.2 sq m).
--- Page 225 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 09 23 - 2
7/31/2026
4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable
of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet (83.6 sq m).
C. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at
standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated
dimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode.
b. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law
dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset
memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed as
complying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled.
c. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 27 26, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion
within an area of 900 square feet (83.6 sq m).
D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.
b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings,
provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power
packs.
c. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or
automatic on/off.
d. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450
square feet (41.8 square meters) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field
of view of 360 degrees.
b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200
square feet (111.5 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
3. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500
square feet (46.5 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
b. Medium Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,000
square feet (92.9 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
c. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 2,000
square feet (185.8 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m).
4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450
square feet (41.8 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200
square feet (111.5 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
5. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450
square feet (41.8 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m), with a field of view
of 360 degrees.
b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200
square feet (111.5 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet (2.7 m).
E. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control,
suitable for use with specified luminaires.
--- Page 226 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 09 23 - 3
7/31/2026
F. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:
1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay
compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage
loads.
2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring
and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.
3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
4. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.
G. Power Packs for Wireless Occupancy Sensors:
1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained relay compatible with specified wireless
occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads.
2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
2.3 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS
A. Description: Factory-assembled wet location listed device suitable for wall or ceiling/eave
mounting, with integral swivel for field adjustment of coverage, capable of detecting motion for
automatic control of load indicated.
B. Sensor Technology: Passive Infrared (PIR) designed to detect occupancy by sensing
movement of thermal energy between zones.
C. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings available up to 15 minutes.
D. Integral Photocell: For dusk to dawn operation.
E. Manual Override: Activated by switching power off to unit and then back on.
F. Load Rating: 1,000 W incandescent and fluorescent load at 120 V ac.
G. Coverage: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 50 feet (15 m) at a mounting height
of 8 feet (2.4 m), with a field of view of 270 degrees.
2.4 TIME SWITCHES
A. Digital Electronic Time Switches:
1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display,
listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917.
2. Program Capability:
a. 7-Day Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each day
of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal schedule
for selected days.
b. Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each
day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal
schedule for selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to
automatically adjust for seasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times.
3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations.
4. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock.
5. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and
temporarily until next scheduled event.
6. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.
2.5 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS
A. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls:
1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and
field-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A.
2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate.
3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.
4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation.
5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles (10.8 to 53.8 lux) turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to
turn-on ratio with delayed turn-off.
6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
7. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
--- Page 227 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 09 23 - 4
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where
applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install lighting control relays furnished under Section 25 36 26
C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for
installation of lighting control devices provided under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor.
D. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to
branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance
with Section 26 27 26.
G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
H. Occupancy Sensor Locations:
1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to
indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required
for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's
recommendations for installed devices.
2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a
minimum of 4 feet (1.2 m) from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as
per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.
I. Outdoor Photo Control Locations:
1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north
facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down.
2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources,
including light sources controlled by the photo control itself.
J. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls
with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control.
K. Where indicated or required, provide cabinet or enclosure in accordance with Section 26 05
33.16 for mounting of lighting control device system components.
END OF SECTION 26 09 23
--- Page 228 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 21 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 21 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support point
dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:
1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).
2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
3. The requirements of the Utility Company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment,
metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility
Company point of supply and service entrance equipment.
B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
C. Utility Company: AVISTA.
D. Division of Responsibility:
1. Pad-Mounted Utility Transformers:
a. Transformer Vaults and Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility
Company requirements.
b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Contractor per
Utility Company requirements.
d. Transformer Protective Bollards: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility
Company requirements.
e. Primary:
1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.
2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.
3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
f. Secondary:
1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.
2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.
3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at
transformer).
2. Pole-Mounted Utility Transformers:
a. Utility Poles: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
d. Primary: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
e. Secondary - Underground Service:
1) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.
2) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at utility
pole).
3. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company.
4. Metering Provisions:
--- Page 229 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 21 00 - 2
7/31/2026
a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company
requirements.
E. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company
requirements.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
END OF SECTION 26 21 00
--- Page 230 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 24 16 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault
current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
C. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service
equipment according to UL 869A.
D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.
E. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each
feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for
each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA EN 10250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
2. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
H. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
I. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices
are provided in accordance with Section 26 43 00, list and label panelboards as a complete
assembly including surge protective device.
J. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs or
sub-feed lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.
2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type,
circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and
features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Bussing:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.
--- Page 231 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 24 16 - 2
7/31/2026
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit
type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,
configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Bussing:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375
where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short
circuit protection.
5. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with
UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.
b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for
protection of equipment.
6. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.
7. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
F. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 05 48.
G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or
switches does not exceed 79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor or working platform.
--- Page 232 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 24 16 - 3
7/31/2026
H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch (27 mm) trade size conduits out of each flush -mounted
panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
J. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
--- Page 233 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 27 26 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere
rating not less than that of the branch circuit.
C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles
installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet (1.8 m) of sinks.
E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.
F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
2.2 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white galvanized steel wall plate.
C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white galvanized steel wall plate.
D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.
E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.
2.3 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches
with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as
complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
2.4 WALL DIMMERS
A. Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control
following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure
preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA
WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for
load controlled as indicated on the drawings.
B. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch.
C. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the
Drawings:
2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA
WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as
indicated on the drawings.
1. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. Convenience Receptacles:
--- Page 234 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 27 26 - 2
7/31/2026
1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-
20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498
Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as
indicated on the drawings.
3. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated
on the drawings.
C. GFCI Receptacles:
1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection
and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as
complying with UL 943, class A.
2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-
20R, rectangular decorator style.
3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type
complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locat ions.
4. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding
wiring devices.
2. Size: Oversized.
3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.
C. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged
cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover
closed.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA
130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
E. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and
tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push- in
pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
G. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
H. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
--- Page 235 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 43 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 43 00 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings, repetitive
surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes, maximum
continuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current (I-n), short circuit current
rating (SCCR), connection means including any required external overcurrent protection,
enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, service condition requirements,
and installed features.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service; listed,
classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended; system voltage as indicated on the
drawings.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally-mounted or factory-installed,
internally-mouonted SPDs.
C. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service
disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of service
disconnect overcurrent device.
D. Protected Modes:
1. Single Split Phase Systems: L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L.
E. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs):
1. 208Y/120V System Voltage: Not more than 1,000 V for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes and
1,200 V for L-L mode.
F. UL 1449 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115% of nominal
system voltage.
G. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA EN 10250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for
the following installation locations:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
END OF SECTION 26 43 00
--- Page 236 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 51 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and
ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed
features.
1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.
2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63
standard format upon request.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and
protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating
system.
F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G. Recessed Luminaires:
1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for
direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.
H. LED Luminaires:
1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,
calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and
local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
B. Battery:
1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where
indicated.
--- Page 237 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 51 00 - 2
7/31/2026
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Exit signs complying with NFPA 101 and applicable state and local codes, and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
B. Powered Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated.
1. Self-Powered Exit Signs:
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS
A. Dimmable LED Drivers:
1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light
output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.
2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.
2.6 LED REPLACEMENT LAMPS
A. Description: Light-emitting diode (LED) self-ballasted lamps listed as complying with UL 1993;
intended for replacement of existing lamps of other light source types, including but not limited
to, incandescent, fluorescent, and high intensity discharge (HID); suitable for installation in
luminaire to be retrofitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
F. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:
1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.
2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support
system is certified as suitable to do so.
3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four
corners.
G. Recessed Luminaires:
1. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible
materials according to listing.
2. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping
materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
H. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.
I. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center
of luminaire.
J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
K. Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting
controls.
L. Exit Signs:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting
controls.
M. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
--- Page 238 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 51 00 - 3
7/31/2026
N. Install lamps in each luminaire.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
--- Page 239 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 56 00 - 1
7/31/2026
SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected
area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with
all proposed features.
1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.
B. Certificates for Poles and Accessories: Manufacturer's documentation that products are
suitable for the luminaires to be installed and comply with designated structural design criteria.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and
protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system.
F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated.
H. LED Luminaires:
1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,
calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
2.3 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS
A. Dimmable LED Drivers:
1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light
output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.
2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.
2.4 LED REPLACEMENT LAMPS
A. Description: Light-emitting diode (LED) self-ballasted lamps listed as complying with UL 1993;
intended for replacement of existing lamps of other light source types, including but not limited
to, incandescent, fluorescent, and high intensity discharge (HID); suitable for installation in
luminaire to be retrofitted.
--- Page 240 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
26 56 00 - 2
7/31/2026
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
F. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.
G. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center
of luminaire.
H. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I. Install lamps in each luminaire.
END OF SECTION 26 56 00
--- Page 241 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
31 11 00 - 1
7/31/2026
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Section 31 11 00
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Section Includes
A. Clearing and Grubbing
1. Removing and disposing of existing features.
2. Removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, shrubs, logs and windfalls.
3. Stripping and disposing of the top layer of plants and grasses down past the root zone.
4-inch minimum depth or as recommended in the geotechnical report, or directed by
Engineer.
4. Removing and disposing of all miscellaneous debris and other objectionable matter.
1.2 Related Documents
A. ITD’s Standard Specifications Section 200 – Earthwork
1.3 Description of Work
A. This covers the clearing and grubbing of the site.
1.4 Regulatory Requirements
A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate clearing work with utility companies.
1.5 Submittals
A. Submit for Engineer ’s Review When Required: Damaged tree replacement/repair (per
3.1.A.5.C).
B. Property Owner Disposal Agreements if required by the Engineer (per 3.6.B.5).
PART 2 MATERIALS – Not applicable to this Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Clearing and Grubbing
A. Protection
1. Locate and protect all aboveground and belowground utilities or relocate as directed by
the Contract.
2. Protect benchmarks and survey monuments from damage and displacement.
3. Protect adjacent private and public land and crops in adjacent fields from damage.
4. Protect existing roads, railroad and irrigation canals from damage.
5. Retain, protect and water any desirable trees or vegetation on or adjacent to the site
using the following procedures.
a. Existing trees not designated for removal should be protected before site
demolition begins.
1) Protection should consist of a highly visible, barrier to be placed at or outside
the drip line of the tree(s).
2) Unless approved by the ENGINEER , no equipment, vehicles, building
materials, chemicals, stockpiles or debris shall be placed inside the protection
barriers.
b. Unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER, disruption of the irrigation facilities
serving trees will not be allowed.
c. Before the CONTRACTOR leaves the site, all existing trees which have been
significantly damaged due to construction activities shall be replaced or repaired
per ENGINEER’s approval by a certified arborist at the expense of the
CONTRACTOR.
--- Page 242 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
31 11 00 - 2
7/31/2026
d. No changes in grade should be made within the protection area around trees.
e. Should excavation damage or break roots greater than one ( 1”) inch in diameter,
make a clean saw cut through the undamaged portion of the root behind the break
perpendicular to the root.
f. If required by the CITY or ENGINEER, hire an approved tree service to trim trees,
prior to beginning excavation.
6. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for damage resulting from construction operations.
7. Take reasonable care to avoid damage by construction operations to streams and lakes
adjacent to the construction area.
8. Preserve and protect all vegetation and ground cover not within the construction area,
including areas not requiring grading, as directed.
B. Removal and Disposal
1. Complete clearing and grubbing to the limits defined by a line drawn five (5’) feet outside
the grading area, unless shown on the Contract Documents or as directed.
2. Preserve and protect trees within the construction area not designated for removal in
an approved manner as directed. Paint cut and scarred areas of retained trees or
shrubs with an asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree surgery.
3. Unless otherwise provided, all merchantable timber in the clearing area not removed
from the right-of-way prior to the beginning of construction becomes the property of the
CONTRACTOR.
4. Remove all brush and shrubs from the site including the roots. Dispose of the shrubs
and brush off-site at a location provided by the CONTRACTOR. Do not dispose of brush
and shrubs by burning or burial in backfill or trenches.
5. Strip all soils, heavy growths of grass, and sod that comprise the organic root -zone.
Complete stripping four (4”) inches deep or as recommended by the ENGINEER. Berm
the stripped material to line and grade if depicted on the Contract Documents. Do not
use the stripped materials as backfill or trench backfill.
6. Unless otherwise directed remove all stumps within the clearing limits.
7. Dispose of materials at locations that comply with all Federal, State, and Local
Regulations.
C. Cleanup
1. Upon completion of the site work and project, clean the entire work area. Remove all
excess excavated material, rocks, boulders, brush, trees, pipe, or debris of any type
from the site and dispose at a site selected by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to
Federal, State, and Local Regulations.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 The accepted quantities of Clearing and Grubbing will be paid for at the contract unit price “per
square yard”, for which price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and
incidentals for the complete removal as shown by the Plans and called for in these Specifications
END OF SECTION
--- Page 243 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
32 11 23 - 1
7/31/2026
AGGREGATE BASE
Section 32 11 23
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or additional
materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing of Specification
sections.
1.2 Description of Work
A. This section covers the construction of the aggregate base course called for on the Plans,
complete.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho Standards
for Public Works Construction and the City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 Geotextile fabric shall be Type II and shall be in accordance with City of Moscow Standard
Construction Specifications ES-6.
2.2 The aggregate base course shall be 3 /4-inch minus crushed rock containing sufficient fine
material to serve as binder. The material shall be hard and durable and shall be in accordance
with City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications ES-7.
A. 1-1/4” (-) Aggregate shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1-1/2 inch 100
1 inch 90-100
½ inch 60-80
No. 4 35-60
No. 8 25-50
No. 30 10-30
No. 200 2-9
The sand equivalent shall not be less than 30 if 5 percent or more of the material passes the
No. 200 sieve. Sand equivalent will not be required if less than 5 percent passes the No.
200 sieve.
B. 3/4" (-) Aggregate shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1-1/2 inch -
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
No. 4 40-65
No. 8 30-50
No. 200 3-9
--- Page 244 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
32 11 23 - 2
7/31/2026
The sand equivalent shall not be less than 30 if 5 percent or more of the material passes the
No. 200 sieve. Sand equivalent will not be required if less than 5 percent passes the No.
200 sieve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR shall install geotextile fabric on prepared subgrade in accordance with City of
Moscow Standard Construction Specifications ES-6 and ES-7.
3.2 The aggregate base course shall be spread on the prepared subgrade and geotextile fabric in a
uniform layer (or layers), without segregation, to such loose depth that when compacted, the
course shall have a minimum thickness of eight (8) inches. Water shall be applied over the
base material in the amount as shown required to achieve specified compaction. The water
shall be thoroughly mixed with the aggregate by processing until the mixture is uniform
throughout. Compaction shall be accomplished by using pneumatic or vibratory rollers. Rolling
operation shall be continued until the aggregate is compacted to not less than ninety-five
percent (95%) of the maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by AASHTO
Designation T99.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Accepted Aggregate Base will be paid for at the contract unit price “per cubic yard”, for which
price and payment shall include all labor, materials, and incidentals for the complete installation
as shown by the Plans and called for in these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 245 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
32 12 16 - 1
7/31/2026
ASPHALT PAVEMENT
Section 32 12 16
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or
additional materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing
of Specification sections.
1.2 Description of Work
A. This section covers the construction of the street pavement called for on the Plans,
complete.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho
Standards for Public Works Construction and the City of Moscow Standard
Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 The Plant Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement shall consist of a mixture of aggregate, filler (if
required) and asphalt. The Plant HMA material shall conform to the requirements of
SUPERPAVE HOT MIX ASPHALT , City of Moscow Standard Construction
Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The Plant Hot Mix Asphalt material shall be placed on the prepared and properly finished
Aggregate Top Course in accordance with the requirements of SUPERPAVE HOT MIX
ASPHALT, City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications . The completed
Bituminous Pavement Surface shall conform to the dimensional requirements of the Civil
Plan, sheet C2.0/C2.1 and the asphalt section identified on sheet C3.0 as shown in the
Construction Plans.
3.2 All improper workmanship and defective materials resulting from overheating, improper
handling or application shall be removed from the surface section by the CONTRACTOR
and be replaced with approved materials and workmanship at his own expense. The
completed pavement surface shall be smooth, dense and of uniform texture and
appearance. All areas shall drain with flow lines free of depressions which permit water to
stand.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 The accepted quantities of Asphalt Pavement will be paid for at the contract unit price
“per ton”, for which price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and
incidentals for the complete installation as shown by the Plans and called for in these
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 246 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
32 16 23 - 1
7/31/2026
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
Section 32 16 23
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or additional
materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing of Specification
sections.
1.2 Description of Work
A. This covers the installation of new concrete sidewalk and pedestrian ramps in the
development at the locations shown on the plans.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho Standards
for Public Works Construction, and the City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 All Concrete sidewalk and pedestrian ramps shall conform to the City of Moscow Standard
Drawings, Plans, and the Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The sidewalk shall conform to the City of Moscow Standard Drawing No. 7.
3.2 Pedestrian Ramps shall conform to the City of Moscow Standard Drawing No. 8 .
CONTRACTOR shall field verify forms and check slopes before placing concrete.
CONTRACTOR is responsible for the construction of the ADA compliant ramps. Any ramp or
landing not conforming to ADA requirements will be removed and replaced at the
CONTRACTOR’S expense.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Payment for Concrete Sidewalk shall be at the contract unit price “per square yard”, for which
price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials , aggregate base, and incidentals
for the complete installation as shown on the Plans and called for in these Specifications.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 247 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
32 17 23 - 1
7/31/2026
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Section 32 17 23
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or additional
materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing of Specification
sections.
C. MUTCD
1.2 Description of Work
A. This section covers the permanent pavement marking of the project.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho Standards
for Public Works Construction and the City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 Pavement markings are required to meet MUTCD standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Contractor is required to coordinate with the exact location of pavement markings with CITY.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Accepted 4” Waterborne Pavement Marking will be paid for at the contract unit price “per lineal
foot”, for which price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals
for the complete items as herein specified.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 248 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
33 41 00 - 1
7/31/2026
STORM SEWER PIPE
Section 33 41 00
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or additional
materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing of Specification
sections.
1.2 Description of Work
A. This section covers the installation of storm drain pipe called for on the Plans, complete.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho Standards
for Public Works Construction and the City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 Storm Drain Pipe shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate sections of the City of
Moscow Standard Construction Specifications. Storm Sewer Pipe and fittings for Storm Sewer
and Catch Basin laterals up to and including eight (8”) inch diameter where called for on the Plans.
2.2 Pipe and fitting jointing shall be bell and spigot utilizing and elastomeric gasket meeting the
requirements of ASTM F-477 for a water tight joint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Excavation and backfill for Storm Sewer Pipes shall be in accordance with SECTION 200 –
EARTHWORK. Storm Sewer pipelines shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
of City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications, including Class F backfill within street
x-section.
3.2 All solid, debris, etc., that remains in the pipe following its installation is the CONTRACTOR’s
responsibility to remove. The water for flushing the lines shall be furnished by the
CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER will direct the CONTRACTOR which lines need to be cleaned.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Accepted Storm Sewer Pipe will be paid for at the contract unit price “per lineal foot”, for which
price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals for the complete
items as herein specified.
END OF SECTION
--- Page 249 ---
City of Moscow – East City Park Stage
Moscow, Idaho
33 44 13 - 1
7/31/2026
STORM SEWER AREA DRAINS
Section 33 44 13
PART 1 SCOPE
1.1 Related Documents
A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section.
B. Other sections of this Specification may relate, and impose additional work and/or additional
materials upon this section. Contractor to coordinate any cross-referencing of Specification
sections.
1.2 Description of Work
A. This section covers the installation of the area drains called for on the Plans, complete.
1.3 Standard Specifications
A. Standard specifications referenced herein shall be the latest edition of the Idaho Standards
for Public Works Construction and the City of Moscow Standard Construction Specifications.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 The area drain shall be a Nyloplast® Area Drain manufactured by ADS or an approved equal.
The grate and frame shall be suitable for the intended loading conditions and installation location
and shall conform to applicable City of Moscow Standard Drawings where required. Installation
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the project plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Installation of the drainage structures, including excavation and backfill, shall be in accordance
with City of Moscow Standard Drawings.
PART 4 PAYMENT
4.1 Accepted Storm Sewer Area Drains will be paid for at the contract unit price “per each”, for
which price and payment shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals for the
complete item as herein specified.
END OF SECTION